2001 Chevrolet Corvette 2001corvette

User Manual: 2001corvette www.c6registry.com - /technical/manuals/

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 383

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2001 Chevrolet Corvette
Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 10424655 A First Edition

Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts

Air Bag System
Restraint Systems for Children

Features and Controls
Section 2

Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers

Cruise Control
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Convenience Net
Accessory Power Outlet
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Driver Information Center
Head-Up Display

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3

Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock

Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player (Option)
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature

Your Driving and the Road
Section 4

Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering

Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

Problems on the Road
Section 5

Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck

iii

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6

Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Brakes
Bulb Replacement

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Maintenance Schedule
Section 7

Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8

Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications

Index
Section 9

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v

We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the
name CORVETTE and the CORVETTE Emblem are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so
the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

Corvette: The American
Dream Machine
In the early ’50s, it was only a designer’s dream. Today
the Corvette stands alone as America’s dream car -- a
testament to its unmistakable charisma and the
excitement it inspires. Unique styling, powerful
performance and an undeniable panache have made
Corvette one of the most celebrated sports cars in
the world.
In 1953, Corvette produced 300 new lightweight
fiberglass roadsters. A handful went to project
engineers, General Motors managers, and a select group
of movie stars and celebrities. With a two-speed
Powerglide automatic transmission, Blue Flame
six-cylinder engine, and gleaming Polo White exterior,
the Corvette began its drive into the heart of America.
Designers freshened up the ’Vette in 1956 by adding a
removable hardtop and the famous Corvette “coves.”
The sculptured body enhanced its sporty look, and a
standard 210-horsepower Chevy V8 engine solidified
Corvette’s reputation as a production race car.

vii

In 1963, Corvette hit the road with an eye-catching new
look -- the Sting Ray coupe. An instant success, the
now-classic Sting Ray featured concealed headlamps
and a unique split rear window. The split window would
only be offered in 1963, making this model among the
most prized Corvettes ever built.

Restyled inside and out for 1968, this ’Vette sported a
lean and hungry shape, creating a sense of motion even
when standing still. And for the first time, Corvette
offered removable roof panels.

viii

For its 25th anniversary, the 1978 Corvette paced the 62nd Annual Indianapolis 500 and received a new fastback
roofline with a wide expanse of glass that wrapped around the sides.

The structure of the fifth-generation redesign is the
stiffest ever developed in 44 years of Corvette
production, resulting in unparalleled ride quality and
outstanding handling. Also unique to the new Corvette
is a rear-mounted transmission.

In 1984, the fourth generation of America’s favorite
sports car anticipated the future with a sleek look and
advanced technology that provided superior handling
and performance. Windshield angle was the sheerest of
any domestic vehicle, cornering ability the tightest of
any production car. In short, the 1984 redesign enhanced
the Corvette’s reputation as a leader in the world sports
car market.
After 44 years of production, Corvette only got better.
The fifth-generation Corvette arrived in 1997, featuring
a completely restyled body and a new, all-aluminum,
5.7 Liter, 345-horsepower LS1 V8 engine.

Available as a Coupe for 1997, the new Corvette offered
such standard features as extended-mobility tires, a
BoseR audio system, and a new, latch-operated roof
designed for easy removal.
With many design cues inspired by the classic models
of the 1960s, the new fifth-generation Corvette is an
impressive combination of sleek styling and world-class
sports car performance. For 1998, in addition to the
Coupe, a convertible was reintroduced. The
fifth-generation Corvette rollout was completed in 1999
with the introduction of the hardtop model.
For 2001, all hardtop models become the higher
performance Z06. The Z06 model features the
performance enhanced LS6 engine, specific suspension
components and exterior/interior differentiation.

Corvette Assembly Plant
The Corvette Assembly Plant in Bowling Green,
Kentucky is one of the most sophisticated and
computerized automobile assembly facilities in
the world. To build your 2001 Corvette, over
1,025 employes teamed up with the 58 high-tech
robots that assist in a variety of processes, from welding
to painting.
The Bowling Green facility is Corvette’s third home
since 1953. Since beginning production in June
of 1981, it has become one of Kentucky’s most
popular tourist attractions.
Corvette Assembly Plant tours are available. For
dates and times, call (270) 745-8228. Reservations
are required for groups of 10 or more.
The new National Corvette Museum, located near the
assembly plant, opened its doors in September of 1994.
It is also attracting tourists to the area. For more
information, call 1-800-53-VETTE (83883)
or (270) 781-7973.

How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.

CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.

Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.

xii

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”

Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
would not be covered by your warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

xiii

Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY

xiv

These symbols
are important for
you and your
passengers
whenever your
vehicle is driven:
CHILD
RESTRAINT
TOP STRAP
ANCHOR

DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:

These symbols
are on some of
your controls:

MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH

WINDSHIELD
WIPER

TURN
SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD
WASHER

PARKING
LAMPS

FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER

POWER
WINDOW

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS

AIR BAG

FOG LAMPS

WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER

REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER

These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP

FUSE

BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM

LIGHTER

HORN
BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN

Here are some
other symbols
you may see:

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

FUEL

Model Reference
This manual covers these models:

Z06

Convertible

Coupe

Service Station Guide

For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood

Cooling System

Battery

See Section 5

See Section 6

Tire Pressure
See Section 6

See Section 6

Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6

Alternate
Fuel Door Release
See Section 6

Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6

Windshield Washer
Hood Release
Fluid
See Section 6

See Section 6

Remote Fuel
Release Door

Fuel
Use unleaded only.

See Section 6

See Section 6
for octane ratings.

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-18
1-19

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Passenger Position

1-19
1-24
1-28
1-31
1-40
1-43
1-43
1-44

Air Bag System
Air Bag Off Switch
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
and also about reclining seatbacks and seatback latches.

Manual Seats

CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

1-2

To move a manual seat, pull up on the lever located in
front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where
you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.

Power Seats (Option)

Sport Seat (Option)

The control for the power seats is located on the
outboard side of each seat, near the base.
Different parts of the power seat control move different
parts of the seat. To move the seat forward or rearward,
move the control in that direction. Move the control up
to raise the seat and down to lower it. By tilting the back
of the control, it will raise or lower the back of the seat.
Tilting the front of the control will raise or lower the
front of the seat.
Your preferred seat position can be stored and recalled if
you have the memory option. See “Memory” in the Index.

If your vehicle is equipped with a sport seat, there are
three other controls that help you change the shape of
the seat in addition to the power seat control. There are
two lumbar supports for the middle (A) and lower (B)
back. There’s also a side bolster control (C) that adjusts
the sides of the seat around you to give you more
lateral support.
For lumbar support, move each control (A and B)
forward to inflate or rearward to deflate.
Move the side bolster control (C) up for more side
support and down for less support.

1-3

Reclining Seatbacks

The lever for the reclining seatback is located on the
outboard side of each seat, near the base.
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your
weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the lever
until it stops, and lean back to position the seatback to
where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback
into place.

1-4

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.

Seatback Latches

CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the
rear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch,
which is located on top of the backside of the seat, and
pull the seatback forward. The seatback will lock down
in this position. To unlock, lift up on the latch and push
the seatback rearward. When you return the seatback to
its original position, make sure the seatback is locked
in place.

1-5

CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.

1-6

CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passenger’s belt
is fastened properly too.

CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

1-7

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.

1-8

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-9

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-10

Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passenger can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

1-11

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will
be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual
called “Children.” Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.

1-12

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again. See “Lap Belt Cinch Feature” in
the Index.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Lap Belt Cinch Feature
If you do not want the lap belt to move freely, pull the
lap belt out all the way to set the lock. To permit the lap
belt to move freely again, unbuckle the belt, let it retract
all the way, and buckle up again.

1-13

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-14

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-15

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-16

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-17

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-18

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Passenger Position
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as
the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.

Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:

CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, air
bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.

1-19

CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
air bags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.

CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children.”

There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the
air bag symbol.

CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-20

The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.

How the Air Bag System Works

The passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the
passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-21

CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.

If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers,
side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?

When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.

1-22

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the passenger’s bag -- will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents
in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent
the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
passenger air bag.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

1-23

D Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,

which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system, when the system commands air bag
inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at
deployment. The module also records speed, engine
rpm, brake and throttle data.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.

NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel or both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the
passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air
bag coverings.

1-24

Air Bag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch in the glove box that you can
use to turn off the passenger’s air bag.

This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if
the person in the passenger’s position is a member of a
passenger risk group identified by the national
government as follows:

Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical
condition which, according to his or her physician:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the
front seat because:

D makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag

D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate
a rear-facing infant seat; or
D the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the
front seat because:

D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear

seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

D causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and

in a crash greater than the potential harm from
turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger,
even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in
a crash.

CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the
national government, that person won’t have the
extra protection of an air bag. In a crash, the air
bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect
the person sitting there. Don’t turn off the
passenger’s air bag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.

D the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.

1-25

The AIR BAG OFF light on the center console switch
panel will come on to let you know that the passenger’s
air bag is off. The passenger’s air bag will remain off
until you turn it back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF
light will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.

To turn off the passenger’s air bag, insert your ignition
key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to
AIR BAG OFF.

1-26

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:

To turn the passenger’s air bag on again, insert your
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the ON position.

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow wires, wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-27

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.

Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

1-28

What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?

Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.

CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a
12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In
addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.

1-29

CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.

1-30

CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.

Restraint Systems for Children

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-31

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-32

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

Q:
A:

How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s
air bag. See “Air Bag Off Switch” and “Securing a
Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position” in
the Index for more on this, including important
safety information.

1-33

Top Strap

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air
bag before using a rear-facing child restraint in
the passenger seat position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-34

Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it
should be anchored.

If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof,
don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in your
vehicle because the strap cannot be anchored properly.
You shouldn’t use this type of child restraint without
anchoring the top strap.

If your vehicle is a Z06, an anchor bracket for a top
strap is located behind the passenger’s seat in the cargo
area. Anchor the top strap to the bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

1-35

Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position

Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There’s an air bag
off switch in the glove box you can use to turn off the
passenger’s air bag when you want to secure a
rear-facing child restraint at the passenger’s position.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for more on this,
including important safety information.
Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned
off, never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here’s why:

1-36

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s air bag has been turned off.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the passenger seat as far
back as it will go.

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The passenger’s air bag could inflate even though
the switch is off. If this ever happens, don’t let
anyone whom the national government has
identified as a member of a passenger air bag
risk group sit in the passenger’s position (for
example, don’t secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in
the Index.

1-37

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. If you are
using a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the air bag is turned off. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, always move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing it in this seat. See “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-38

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-39

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

Older Children

If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facing
child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who
will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air bag
risk group. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.

1-40

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q:
A:

What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.

1-41

Q:
A:

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-42

Safety Belt Extender

Checking Your Restraint Systems

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-43

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If you ever see a label on the driver’s safety belt that
says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new
belt will be there to help protect you in a collision. You
would see this label on the belt near the latch plate.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.

1-44

Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-9
2-14
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-24
2-26
2-28
2-31
2-35
2-36
2-38

Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Memory (Option)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
Theft-Deterrent System
PASS-KeyR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Switch
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic
Transmission)
2-

2-38
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-43
2-51
2-53
2-54
2-57
2-62
2-69
2-76
2-80
2-93

Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission
Models Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) (Option)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Roof Panel (If Equipped)
Convertible Top (Option)
The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages
Driver Information Center (DIC)

2-1

Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Power Windows
With power windows, switches on the door control each
window when the ignition is on or when RAP is present.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index.

2-2

Express-Down Windows

Both the driver’s and passenger’s window switches have
the express-down feature. Tap AUTO and immediately
release. The window will lower completely. To stop the
express-down feature from lowering the window
completely, simply tap the switch again.
You can also open the window any amount by pressing
and releasing the switch.
To close the window, press and hold the up arrow.

2-3

Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-4

One key is used for the
ignition, the driver’s door
and all other locks.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index for more information.

NOTICE:

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer gives the
first owner a key and a bar coded tag. Both the key and
the tag are attached to a key ring.

Your vehicle has a number of features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.

The paper tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make an extra key. Keep the
bar-coded tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll
be able to have a new one made easily using this tag. If
your key doesn’t have a tag and you need a new ignition
key, go to your Chevrolet dealer for the correct key code.

2-5

Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.

2-6

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your door key on the driver’s side
or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If your theft-deterrent system is armed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or by using the remote
keyless entry transmitter to open either door to avoid
setting off the alarm. See “Theft-Deterrent System” in
the Index.

To lock the door from the inside, move the lever located
on the door forward. To unlock it, move the lever on the
door rearward.

Power Door Locks

Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside or with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Then get out and close the door.

Memory (Option)

Press the power door switch on either door to unlock or
lock both doors at once.

Inadvertent Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when a door is
open and a key is in the ignition, a chime will sound.
If the power door lock switch is pressed again within
five seconds, the doors will lock.

MEMORY can store and recall the settings for the
driver’s seat position, the outside rearview mirror
positions, telescopic steering wheel (if equipped), radio
presets, tone, volume, playback mode (AM/FM, tape
or CD), last displayed station, compact disc position and
tape direction and the last climate control setting.

2-7

The MEMORY buttons are located on the driver’s door,
above the power mirror controls. The MEMORY
buttons can store and recall settings for up to three
drivers. Use button “1” to store the settings for the
first driver, button “2” for a second driver or press
buttons 1 and 2 at the same time for a third driver.
To store your memory settings:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat position,
outside rearview mirror positions, and telescopic
steering wheel (if equipped).
2. Press and hold a MEMORY button. The light above
the MEMORY button will glow steady for one
second and then flash once when the settings are
complete. Then the light will go off.
3. Set the climate control temperature, fan speed and
mode settings, radio presets, tone, volume, playback
mode (AM/FM, tape or CD), tape direction and
compact disc position.
Your memory settings are now programmed. Any
changes that are made to the audio system and climate
controls while driving will be automatically stored when
the ignition key is turned off.

2-8

When first entering your vehicle, after pressing the
unlock button on your remote keyless entry transmitter
or a MEMORY button, a recall of your settings will
occur when the door is closed and the ignition key is in
the ignition switch. As the memory settings are recalled,
the light above the button will flash until the correct
settings are achieved, then glow for five seconds
when complete.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat, mirror or steering column position button.
When your remote keyless entry transmitter has been
programmed to driver 1, 2 or 3, and you insert the key into
the ignition, memory will also occur. Drivers 1, 2 and
3 correspond to the order in which your remote keyless
entry transmitters were programmed. See “Fob Training”
in the Index for more information.
Memory recall will not work if the vehicle is moving.
Memory recall will be temporarily interrupted during
engine crank.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Your vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
that allows you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock
your hatch/trunk lid, turn the panic alarm on and off and
disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.
Your vehicle comes
standard with two
transmitters, and up to
three can be matched to
your vehicle.

Your RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in
this section.

2-9

If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keyless entry
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D Check to determine if battery replacement is

Operation
The driver’s door will unlock when the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, or press
the unlock button again within 10 seconds to unlock
both doors. Also, by pressing the unlock button, it may
automatically disarm your theft-deterrent system,
depending on how the theft-deterrent system is
programmed. If it’s dark enough outside, your interior
lamps will come on.

D Check to make sure that an electronic device such

Your memory settings will also be recalled when you
press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See “Memory” in the Index for
more information.

D Try to resynchronize the transmitter.

The hatch/trunk lid will unlock when the button with the
trunk symbol is pressed, as long as the ignition is turned
to OFF.

necessary. See the instructions that follow.

as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
See “Resynchronization” in this section.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

2-10

The system has a feature that makes it difficult for you
to lock your keys in your vehicle. If you leave your keys
in the ignition and attempt to lock the doors, the vehicle
will not lock and a chime will sound to remind you that
the keys are in the ignition. If the door lock is pressed
again, within five seconds, the doors will lock and the
keys can be locked in the vehicle. This system can’t
guarantee that you will never be locked out of your
vehicle. Always remember to take your keys with you.
Panic Alarm Button
When you press the horn button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the horn will sound. This panic alarm
button will allow you to attract attention, if needed.
If the horn alarm sounds, there are three ways to turn
it off:

D Push the panic alarm button again on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.

D Wait 90 seconds, and the horn will turn off by itself.
D Turn the key to any position in the ignition,

RKE Settings
You can adjust the settings on the system through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can change the
type of alarm used by the theft-deterrent system.
See “Driver Information Center Controls and Displays”
in the Index for more information.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only three transmitters
matched to it.

except OFF.

2-11

To match transmitters to your vehicle:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Clear any warning messages on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) by pressing the RESET button.
3. Press the OPTIONS button on the DIC several times
until the blank page is displayed, then press and hold
the RESET button for two seconds.
4. When the message FOB TRAINING is displayed,
push the RESET button once. The message HOLD
LK + UNLK 1ST FOB in the DIC will be displayed.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter simultaneously for five seconds.
6. When a transmitter is learned (matched), the DIC
will display FOB LEARNED and then prompt you
to learn the second transmitter.

The programming mode will shut off if any of following
has occurred:

D You don’t program any transmitters for two minutes.
D You take the key out of the ignition.
D You have programmed three transmitters.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the third transmitter.
8. Remove the key from the ignition.

2-12

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.

Replacing the Battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter

Resynchronizing Your Transmitter
Your RKE system uses a continually changing code for
increased security. Normally, the receiver in your
vehicle will keep track of this changing code. If your
vehicle does not respond to your transmitter, do the
following to determine what’s wrong:
1. Get closer to the vehicle and try pressing a button
again. Your battery may be low. If so, see “Battery
Replacement” in the Index.
2. While standing close to your vehicle, press the
lock and unlock buttons on your transmitter at the
same time and hold for seven seconds. This will
attempt to resynchronize the security code in your
RKE transmitter.
3. When resynchronization is achieved, the horn
will chirp.

1. Insert a coin into the slot on the back of the
transmitter and gently pry apart the front and back.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.

If attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the
vehicle are not successful, you may need to match the
transmitter to the vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s)
to Your Vehicle” in the Index.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it
together so water won’t get in.
5. Test the transmitter.

2-13

Hatch/Trunk Lid Release

Press the button with the trunk symbol on it, located at the
left side of the steering column on the instrument panel, to
release the hatch/trunk lid from inside your vehicle.
The remote keyless entry transmitter will also release
the hatch/trunk lid. See “Remote Keyless Entry System”
in the Index.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hatch and you have lost
battery power, use the manual release cables to open the
hatch. To access the cables, remove the two access panels
located in the rear of the trunk area. There is one cable
located under each access panel. See “Rear Storage
Compartments” in the Index for more information.

To use the hatch/trunk lid release on vehicles with an
automatic transmission, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For manual transmissions,
set the parking brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.

2-14

Pull each cable straight down for each latch to release
the hatch.
If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible
top/hardtop and you have lost battery power, use the
manual release cable to open the trunk lid. To access the
cable, remove the center storage compartment lid
located in the rear of the trunk area. See “Rear Storage
Compartments” in the Index for more information.

Pull the cable straight down to release the trunk lid.
If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top and
trunk release handle and you have lost battery power,
use the trunk release handle to open the trunk.
See “Trunk Release Handle” in the Index for
more information.

2-15

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch/trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the hatch/trunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body and
the hatch/trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on BI-LEVEL or VENT. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-16

NOTICE:
If you put things in the hatch/trunk area, be sure
they won’t break the glass when you close it.
Never slam the hatch/trunk lid down. You could
break the glass or damage the defogger grid.
When you close the hatch/trunk lid, make sure
you pull down from the center, not the sides. If
you pull the hatch/trunk lid down from the side
too often, the weatherstrip can be damaged.

NOTICE:
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the rear
storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk
area. If you do, the objects could damage
the underbody.

Trunk Release Handle (If Equipped)

NOTICE:
The trunk release handle was not designed to be
used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchor
point when securing items in the trunk. Improper
use of the trunk release handle could damage it.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
on the rear wall of the trunk below the latch. This handle
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release
handle down to open the trunk from the inside.

2-17

Theft

Parking at Night

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Key in the Ignition

Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your key?
Do not leave valuables in your vehicle, since there
would be no place to secure them.

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition will be locked. If you have an automatic
transmission, it will be locked. If you have a manual
transmission, the steering wheel will also be locked.
And remember to lock the doors.

2-18

Parking Lots

Theft-Deterrent System

Testing the Alarm

Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent
alarm system.

Use the following to test the system:

With this system, the
SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off). This
light reminds you to arm the
theft-deterrent system.

1. Make sure the hatch/trunk lid is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 15 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually
unlock the driver’s door.
6. Open the door. The alarm should sound.

Arming the System

7. Turn off the alarm.

Use one of the two following items listed here to arm
the system:

If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index. If the horn works, but
the alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer.

D Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

D Open the door. (The SECURITY light should flash.)
Lock the door with the power door lock switch. The
SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on.
Close the door. The SECURITY light should go off.

2-19

Disarming the System
Always use your key or the remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock a door. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm. If your alarm sounds, listed
below are the ways you can disarm it:

D Unlock the driver’s door with your key.
D Put the key in the ignition.
D Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened without
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
alarm will go off. Your horn will sound for two minutes,
then it will go off to save battery power. And, your
vehicle won’t start.
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock the
driver’s door with a key, the manual door lock, or if you
use the power door lock after the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keys, have the passenger lock the vehicle after
the doors are closed. This way the alarm won’t arm, and
your passenger won’t set it off.

PASS-KeyR
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.

PASS-Key uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that
matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key system senses that someone is using
the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel
systems. For about three minutes, the starter won’t work
and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someone tries to start
your vehicle again or uses another key during this time,
the shutdown period will start over again. This discourages
someone from randomly trying different keys with
different resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match.
The key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted in the
ignition or the engine may not start. If the SECURITY
light comes on, the key may be dirty or wet.

2-20

If this happens and the starter won’t work, turn the
ignition off. Clean and dry the key, wait three minutes
and try again. If the starter still won’t work, wait three
minutes and try the other ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index). If the starter won’t work with
the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, you will see no SECURITY
light. You don’t have to wait three minutes before trying
the proper key.
If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the starter
won’t work. Use the other ignition key, and see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key to
have a new key made.
If the SECURITY light comes on while driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key ignition key, see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key. In an
emergency, call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance. See
“Roadside Assistance” in the Index for more information.

New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.

2-21

Front Air Dam
Your vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has
minimal ground clearance for aerodynamics. For this
reason, the air dam has a spring-loaded hinge provided
and it will retract with road contact.

Ignition Switch
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn the
switch to four positions.

Under normal operation, the air dam will occasionally
contact some road surfaces (speed bumps, driveway
ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as a
scraping noise. This is normal and does not indicate
a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road
surfaces and avoid them when possible.

OFF: The only position from which you can remove
the key.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch can’t be turned to OFF unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
ACC: This is the position in which you can operate
your electrical power accessories. With the key in this
position, the automatic transmission and steering
column will unlock.

2-22

CAUTION:
If you have a manual transmission, removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC.

NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.

ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start the engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to
operate your electrical power accessories and to display
some instrument panel cluster messages and telltales.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the key is
in the ignition.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, your power windows and the audio system
will continue to work for up to 15 minutes after the
ignition key is turned to OFF and neither door is opened.
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio
system will shut off.

2-23

Starting Your Engine

Manual Transmission

This vehicle has a computer system that monitors engine
speed, throttle and pedal position, and records the
current status.

The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start
the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is
not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature.

Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

2-24

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your
battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0_F or -18_C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator
pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until
your engine has run for a while.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing
your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
holding it there as you hold the key in START for about
three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key
and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the
pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.

NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.

Starter Interlock Feature
For your convenience and to avoid damage to your
starter, your vehicle is equipped with a starter interlock
feature. This feature will not allow you to crank the
engine when the vehicle is already running.

2-25

Racing or Other Competitive Driving

Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)

See your Warranty Book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving.

NOTICE:
If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, your engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels
can damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil
level often during racing or other competitive
driving and keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L)
above the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range on the engine oil dipstick. For
information on how to add oil, see “Adding Oil”
under “Engine” in the Index. After the
competitive driving, remove excess oil so that the
level on the dipstick is not above the upper mark
that shows the proper operating range.

2-26

The engine coolant heater is located on the driver’s side
of the engine under the manifold.
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is attached to the generator
bracket assembly, between the generator and the
windshield washer fluid tank.With the headlamps
closed, route the cord in the opening between the
headlamp door and the fender panel on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. Do not pinch the cord when
closing the hood.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind
of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to
list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in
the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer
can give you the best advice for that particular area.

2-27

Automatic Transmission Operation

CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.

2-28

Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and release the shift
lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear
you wish. If you do not apply the brake after 15 seconds
once the ignition is turned on, you will receive a PRESS
BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Shifting Out of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.

2-29

NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ): This position is for
normal driving.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ).

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ):

D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) when you start the
vehicle, the transmission will drive (and stay) in second
gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to

2-30

the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces, or for preventing
the transmission from downshifting into FIRST (1) in
situations where a downshift would be undesirable.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it
on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector
lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission won’t shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transmission. Use
your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your
vehicle in position on a hill.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.

Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern
for the six-speed
manual transmission.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH
(6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal
and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.

Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure
to get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the
vehicle is rolling (at less than 3 mph (5 km/h)). You will
be locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). If you
have turned your ignition off and wish to park your
vehicle in REVERSE (R), you will have to move the shift
lever quickly to the right, and immediately forward
into gear.

2-31

Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)

CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.

2-32

If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or
more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for
good engine performance.

NOTICE:
When you are shifting gears, don’t move the
gearshift lever around needlessly. This can
damage parts of the transmission and may
require costly repair. Shift directly into the next
appropriate gear.

One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)
instead of FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2).

You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn
off this feature. This helps you get the best possible
fuel economy.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a
lower gear if you prefer.

NOTICE:
Do not try to force the shift lever into SECOND (2)
or THIRD (3) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes
on. Do not try to re-engage FIRST (1) after
starting to shift into FOURTH (4). You will damage
your transmission. Shift only from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.
This light will come on when:

D The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169_F (76_C),
D you are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and
D you are at 21 percent throttle or less.

2-33

Downshifting (Manual Transmission)
Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed
greater than shown in the table:
FIRST (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mph (80 km/h)
SECOND (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 mph (119 km/h)
THIRD (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 mph (163 km/h)
FOURTH (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mph (209 km/h)

NOTICE:
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
downshift, you can damage the clutch, driveshaft
or transmission.

2-34

The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers the
gearshift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4). This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2) or downshifting from SIXTH (6) to
FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the gearshift lever
toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3). Make sure you
move the lever into SECOND (2) or FIFTH (5). If you
let the gearshift lever move in the direction of the
pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up. This sets your parking
brake. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Then push the release button in as you move the parking
brake lever all the way down.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle. Make sure the brake
warning light is not on before driving.

2-35

Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
remove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is
in PARK (P).

2-36

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-37

Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See “Automatic Transmission
Operation” in the Index.
As a reminder, you will see a message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) that will say PRESS BRAKE
BEFORE SHIFT within 15 seconds unless the brake
is pressed.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.

2-38

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACC.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon
as possible.

Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
key to OFF, remove the key and release the clutch.

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:

CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-39

Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.

2-40

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard
axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has
no traction and the other does, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

Selective Real Time Damping
(SRTD) (Option)
You may have a ride control system on your vehicle
called Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD). The
system provides the following performance benefits:

D
D
D
D

Reduced Impact Harshness
Improved Road Isolation
Improved High-Speed Stability
Improved Handling Response

TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to the road conditions.
PERF: Use for performance driving. This setting
provides a tight, firm ride and precise response to
road conditions.
You can select a setting at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best ride
and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving
conditions change.
There are three Driver Information Center (DIC)
messages that are displayed when a malfunction occurs
with the SRTD system. Refer to “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index.

Horn
To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on the
steering wheel.

This switch is located on the center console. Turn it to
select the suspension of your choice.

2-41

Tilt Wheel

Telescopic Steering Wheel (If Equipped)

A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel.

The telescopic steering wheel switch is located on the
right side of the steering column.

You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

To operate the telescopic
steering wheel, push the
switch forward and the
wheel will move away from
you. Pull the switch
rearward and the wheel will
move toward you.

The telescopic steering wheel position can be stored
with your memory settings. See “Memory” in the
Index for more information.

The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and
pull the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
steering wheel into place.

2-42

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.

The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column includes the following:

D
D
D
D
D

Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamps
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Cruise Control

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows flash
faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
bulbs. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

2-43

Turn Signal on Chime

Headlamp Doors

A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.

Headlamps
The headlamp band on the turn signal/multifunction
lever controls the following:

D
D
D
D

Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking lamps
Sidemarker lamps

Turn the band to this symbol to turn on the
parking and other operating lamps except for the
headlamps.
Turn the band to this symbol to turn on the
headlamps and other operating lamps.
Turn the band to OFF to turn off the lamps.

2-44

The headlamp doors are designed to open when you
turn the headlamps on, and close when you turn the
headlamps and parking lamps off. If you turn the
headlamps on, then turn back to the parking lamps
setting, the headlamp doors will stay open.

You can open the doors manually using the knob next to
the headlamp assembly. Turn the knob counterclockwise
until the doors are open. Turn the knob clockwise to
close the doors manually.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, push the turn signal lever all the way forward.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on. To change
the headlamps from high to
low, pull the lever rearward.

The headlamp doors should be open when driving in
icy or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from
freezing closed and when washing the vehicle to help
clean the headlamps.

NOTICE:
In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to
the headlamp doors, either take care in raising
the hood with the headlamps up, or turn off the
headlamps prior to opening the hood.

Lamps on Reminder
If you turn the ignition off and leave the headlamps or
parking lamps on and open a door, you will hear a chime
reminding you to turn off the lamps.

Flash-to-Pass Feature
To use the flash-to-pass feature, momentarily pull the
turn signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator
will flash to indicate to the other driver that you intend
to pass. If the low-beam headlamps are off and you have
the optional fog lamps on, the fog lamps will flash.

2-45

Windshield Wipers

You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Push the lever up to INT (intermittent), then turn
the band, located on the lever, to adjust the delay time.
Turn the band up for a shorter delay or down for a
longer delay. The wiper speed can only be adjusted
when the lever is in the INT position, not in HI or LO.
For steady wiping at low speed, move the lever up to the
LO position. For steady high-speed wiping, move the
lever up further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the
lever down to OFF.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

You can control the windshield wipers by moving the
lever with the wiper symbol on it. This lever is located
on the right side of the steering column.
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever down to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more
cycles, hold the lever on MIST longer.

2-46

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer

Cruise Control

The lever on the right side of the steering column also
controls the windshield washer. There is a pushbutton at the
end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the button and hold it. The washer will spray until you
release the button. The wipers will continue to clear the
window for about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.

CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take
60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to
turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid
mixture to use, see “Windshield Washer Fluid” and
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

2-47

When using cruise control, the accelerator pedal will
return to its fully-released position and will not move
while cruise control is engaged.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed in a digital number. For example, the
DIC will say CRUISE SET 60 mph (97 km/h). The
cruise set speed and the speedometer indicated speed
may not always be exactly the same. When you
apply the brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise
control disengages. The DIC will show CRUISE
DISENGAGED. See “DIC Warnings and Messages”
in the Index.

CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you

can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See “Traction
Control System” in the Index. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.

2-48

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it. The cruise set speed will be displayed by
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The pedal
will return to an “idle” position.

Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and
then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. But you don’t
need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, you can move the cruise control switch to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly. The Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display the cruise set speed.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. The
speed will not begin to increase until sufficient pedal
travel is achieved. Push the SET button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

2-49

D Move the cruise switch to R/A. Hold it there until

you get up to the speed you want, then release the
switch. (To increase your speed in very small
amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly, then
release it. Each time you do this, the vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)

The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce speed while using
cruise control:

D Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until

you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, push the

SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase speed. When you
take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down
to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch

pedal, if you have a manual transmission vehicle.

D Move the cruise switch to OFF.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
message “CRUISE DISENGAGED.”
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-50

Exterior Lamps

Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lights are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
D The ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is off and
D the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps
will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t
be lit up either.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake while the ignition is in OFF. Then start the
vehicle. The DRL, headlamps and parking lamps will
stay off until you release the parking brake.

Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your parking lamps or low-beam headlamps
must be on or the fog lamps won’t work.
To turn the fog lamps on, push the button located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. A
light on the button will come on when the fog lamps are
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

2-51

Twilight SentinelR Automatic Lamp
Control (Optional, Standard in Canada)
Twilight Sentinel can turn your lamps on and off for
you. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the Twilight Sentinel work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
You can customize your vehicle to turn Twilight
Sentinel on or off (except for vehicles first sold in
Canada). See “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the
Index to turn this feature on or off.
When Twilight Sentinel is turned on, you will see the
following happen:

D When it’s dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that
come on with headlamps will also come on.

D When it’s bright enough outside, the headlamps will
go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will
come on, as long as the headlamp switch is in the
OFF position.

With Twilight Sentinel turned on, you can idle the
vehicle with the lamps off, even when it’s dark outside.
First set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF.
Then start the vehicle. The lamps will stay off until you
release the parking brake.

2-52

Twilight Sentinel also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel has turned on
the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:

D The headlamp switch is moved from OFF to the
parking lamp position, or

D a delay time that you select has elapsed.
See “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the Index to
select the delay time that you want. You can also select
no delay time.
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamp switch in
the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

Parade Mode

Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
This knob controls the
brightness of the instrument
panel lights when the
headlamps or parking lamps
are on.

The instrument panel brightness knob has an added
feature called parade mode to assist you in seeing
certain instrument panel controls if your headlamps are
on in the daylight. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
dim the instrument panel lights or clockwise to brighten
the lights. This will occur only with the parking lamps
or headlamps on.

Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the
interior lamps will go on (unless it’s bright outside).
You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob all the way clockwise.
Push and release the knob and it will pop out.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way down
with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.

Exit and Entry Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle for up to 20 seconds. With exit
lighting, the interior lamps will come on when the key is
turned to OFF or a door is ajar for about 20 seconds.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly
turning the headlamps on and off or by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.

2-53

Reading Lamps

Inadvertent Load Control
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console or
glove box lamps are accidentally left on. If you leave any
of these lamps on, they will automatically time out after
about 15 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must
be turned off or the ignition key must be in ON.

Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
An inside rearview mirror is attached above the
windshield. The mirror pivots so that you can adjust it.

Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the
doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on individually
by pressing the switch (each lamp has its own switch).
There is also an interior console flood lamp located
underneath the rearview mirror which comes on with the
headlamps or parking lamps.

2-54

You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Pull
the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab
forward for daytime driving.

Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview
Mirror with Map Lamps (Option)
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic
day/night rearview mirror with map lamps.
This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.

The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off
by pressing the IO button located on the lower part of
the mirror. Press and hold the IO button for up to
three seconds to turn this feature on or off.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.

Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview
Mirror (If Equipped)
The driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare
of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by
the on and off setting on the inside electrochromic
mirror. See “Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview
Mirror” in the Index.

The mirror includes two map lamps and an automatic
dimming function.

2-55

Power/Heated Remote Control Mirrors

Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.

CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The electric mirror control is on the driver’s door. It
controls the driver’s and passenger’s mirrors. To adjust
either mirror, press the LT (left) or RT (right) button to
select the mirror, then press the arrows to adjust the
direction of the mirror. The mirror will stay selected for
20 seconds after the last adjustment. An indicator light
will come on above the mirror that you select.
Your preferred mirror position can be stored if you have
the memory option. See “Memory” in the Index.
For operation of the heated outside mirrors, see
“Rear Window Defogger” in the Index.

2-56

Storage Compartments

Center Console Storage

Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your door
key to lock or unlock it. The glove box has a light inside.

Instrument Panel Cupholder
The cupholder is located on the center console in front
of the ashtray. To open it, place your thumb on the left
side of the lid and push down. Raise the right side with
your index finger.

To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’s
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger’s side.
You can use the key to lock and unlock the console.
Don’t leave the key in the lock, or it could be damaged
when the driver sits down.
The fuel filler door release button and accessory power
outlet are located inside the center console.

2-57

Security Shade (Option)

Rear Storage Compartments

The security shade can provide hidden storage in the
rear area of the vehicle. The shade is also helpful in
blocking the glare from the removeable roof when it is
stored in the rear compartment.

There are three rear storage compartments in the floor of
the rear hatch/trunk area on the passenger’s and driver’s
side of the vehicle.

Using the Security Shade
1. Hook the elastic loops
on the front corners (A)
of the shade to the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the rear
hatch frame.

Coupe shown, Convertible and Z06 similar
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.

2-58

If you have a coupe or convertible model, your vehicle
will be equipped with three storage compartment lids.
If you have a Z06, your vehicle’s three storage
compartments will not have lids.

NOTICE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trunk-mounted CD changer, it is stored in the
center rear storage compartment. To help avoid
damage to the compact disc player, do not store
items such as liquids or sharp objects that could
damage, puncture or cut the trunk-mounted
CD changer or wiring.

To access a storage compartment, pull up on the latch to
release the lid. Remove the storage compartment lid.
When replacing a storage compartment lid, make sure
the latch is in the correct location so the latch locks
securely into place.

NOTICE:
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the storage
compartments located in the hatch/trunk area. If
you do, the objects could damage the underbody.

2-59

Convenience Net (Option)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see
it on the back wall of the rear area of the vehicle.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help
keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick
starts and stops. The convenience net is not for larger,
heavier loads.
You can unhook the net and place it in one of the rear
storage compartments when you are not using it. On coupe
models only, a vinyl storage bag has also been provided.

Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the
instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the
ashtray, lift up on the bottom of the door.

Loose objects (such as paper clips) can lodge behind and
beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement of the lid. You
should avoid putting small, loose objects near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.

Sun Visors

NOTICE:

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them to the side.

Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
the ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking
materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors

2-60

Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the
lighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lamps
will come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.

Accessory Power Outlet
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet. The outlet can
be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio. Be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the equipment. Leave the cap on
when the accessory power outlet is not in use.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the
power accessory outlet and could result in blown vehicle or
adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see you dealer for
additional information on the power accessory outlets.

NOTICE:
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or your
dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.

NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlet:
D The maximum load of any electrical
equipment should not exceed 15 amps.
D Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods can
drain the battery.

2-61

Floor Mats (Option)

Roof Panel (If Equipped)

Your vehicle’s floor mats are specially designed to
remain in position under your feet and out of reach of
the accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held
in place by two locator hooks and the passenger’s side is
held in place by one.

Removing the Roof Panel

Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.

How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mats
To remove the floor mats,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from the
locator hooks.

CAUTION:
Don’t try to remove the roof panel while the
vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof
panel while the vehicle is moving could cause an
accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and
cause you to lose control, or it could fly off and
strike another vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Remove the roof panel only when the
vehicle is parked.
Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone, have
someone help you.

To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the floor
mat over the locator hooks and push down into place.

2-62

NOTICE:
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its
edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped
stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors
and turn them toward the door glass.
3. Open the rear liftgate and remove any items that may
interfere with proper storage of the roof panel.

4. Make sure to install the two egg-shaped stowage
receivers into the floor of the rear storage
compartment. Secure both receivers into their proper
positions by turning them counterclockwise.
5. Lower the windows and open the doors.

2-63

There are two latches on the front of the roof panel
near each door (A), and one rear latch (B).

2-64

6. To unlock the front of the roof panel, pull down
each of the front handles. Grasp the handles with
your fingers and pull each toward you. Complete a
180_ turn toward the center of the vehicle. Then
push up on each of the handles.

7. To unlock the rear of the roof panel, press the latch
release button with your thumb and pull down the
latch lever with your fingers.
8. After releasing the latches, return the sun visors to
the forward position.

9. Stand on one side of the vehicle and, if necessary,
have your helper stand on the other side. Together,
carefully lift the front edge of the panel up and
forward, and out of the vehicle opening.
10. When the panel is loosened from the vehicle, one
person should grasp the roof panel as close to
the center of the vehicle as possible and lift away
the panel.

2-65

Storing the Roof Panel

CAUTION:
If the roof panel is not stored properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Whenever you store the roof panel in the vehicle,
always be sure that it is stored securely in the
rear area using the storage pins.

NOTICE:
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its edges.
Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped stowage
receivers after removing it from the vehicle.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the rear edge of the
panel is facing the storage area. The locating pins
(at the rear of the panel) should point toward the
egg-shaped stowage receivers on the floor of the
center compartment.
2. Push the panel forward until the pins bottom out in
the receivers.

2-66

3. There are two spring-loaded storage pins on the rear wall
of the storage compartment (A). These storage pins go
into the slots on each side of the roof panel (B).

4. Gently lower the roof panel onto the carpeted ledge.
Then, pull each release rearward and upward to place
the storage pins into the holes of the roof panel.
5. Gently lift and lower the roof panel to be sure it is
locked into place.

2-67

Installing the Roof Panel

CAUTION:
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into
or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. After installing the roof panel, always
check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on
the underside of the panel. Check now and then
to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.

NOTICE:
To avoid damage to the roof panel, paint
and weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on
its edges.

2-68

1. Check to be sure that the front handles and rear latch
on the ceiling are in their opened positions before
attempting to install the roof panel.
2. If the roof panel is stored in the rear area, grasp it
with your right hand at the middle edge near the
seatbacks, and with your left hand at the middle of
the edge closest to you. Reverse the steps described
previously under “Storing the Roof Panel.”
3. Remove the roof panel from the storage compartment.
4. In most cases, it is easier to install the removable
roof with two people rather than one. Place the roof
panel over the vehicle.

6. Turn the front handles toward the side doors to the
closed position.
7. Hook the rear latch by pushing the lever up to the
locked position.
8. Grasp and tug the roof panel up and down and
side-to-side to make sure the roof panel is
securely installed.

Convertible Top (Option)
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of the convertible top.

5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening (A).
Then align the pins at the rear of the roof panel
weatherstrip with the receiving cup in the body
weatherstrip (B). Gently lower the front edge of the
roof panel to the front of the body opening (C).

NOTICE:
Certain automatic car washes may cause damage
to the vehicle. The top fabric can be damaged by
top cleaning brushes.
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
“Cleaning Your Convertible Top” in the Index.

2-69

When lowering and raising the convertible top, you will
use the following:

Lowering the Convertible Top

NOTICE:
Don’t leave the convertible out with the top down
for any long periods of time. The sun and rain
can damage the seat material and other things
inside the vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual
transmission into REVERSE (R).
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors
and turn them toward the door glass.
A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top
B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Storage Compartment Lid

2-70

NOTICE:
Before lowering the convertible top into the
storage area, be sure there are no objects in the
way of the folded, stored top. The weight of a
stored top on items in the storage area may cause
the convertible top back glass to break.

3. Unlock the front of the convertible top by lowering
the latch handles and turning them inward. Push the
latch handles back to the up position.

4. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward
on the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to be
vertical off the storage compartment lid (C).
The front edge (A) and rear edge (B) should be
straight up and down.

2-71

If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
open the storage compartment lid (C) using the
manual release cable.

5. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the storage
compartment release button located on the underside of
the storage compartment lid (C) behind the driver’s
seat. Then raise the storage compartment lid (C). While
attempting to raise the lid, if the lid does not release
and you hear three chimes, check to make sure the
trunk lid is closed. Also, the lid will not release if the
alarm is turned on or the trunk lid is open.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s and
passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position.

2-72

The cable is located underneath the carpeting behind
the driver’s and passenger’s seats, in the center of the
vehicle. When using the manual release, you must
first open the doors to prevent damage to the seals.
To access the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting.
Then pull the cable to release the storage
compartment lid if needed.

NOTICE:
Be sure that the rear edge (B) of the convertible
top is in the full-down position before lowering
the top into the storage compartment or damage
to the top may occur.

7. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored position.
8. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure that the top is fully retracted.
9. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing
with a swift, firm motion.

6. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the convertible
top to allow the rear edge (B) of the convertible top
to be moved to its full-down position.

2-73

Raising the Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
Lower both windows and sun visors and turn the
ignition key to OFF.

3. Pull the top up by firmly gripping the front edge (A)
of the convertible top with your hand and applying a
brisk, firm upward and forward motion to get the top
in the full-up position.
2. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the storage
compartment release button, or use the manual
release cable if battery power has been lost. Lift the
storage compartment lid (C). (After pressing the
release button, the driver and passenger door glass
should retract to the full-down position, if they have
not already been lowered.)

2-74

5. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing
with a swift, firm motion.
6. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
7. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top
down from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the
front edge (A) of the convertible top down from the
center pull-down handle located in the inside of
the vehicle.
8. Turn the latches outward to secure the top in the
up position.
4. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its
full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).

2-75

The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

2-76

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Instrument Panel Brightness Control

O. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown)

B. Head-Up Display Controls (Option)
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

P. Traction Control System (TCS) Switch/Active
Handling Switch

D. Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Located in the Instrument Cluster)

Q. Accessory Power Outlet
(Located in the Center Console)

E. Instrument Panel Cluster

R. Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) (Option)

F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

S. Air Bag Off Light

G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons

T. Instrument Panel Cupholder

H. Hazard Warning Flasher Button

U. Remote Fuel Door Release Button
(Located in the Center Console)

I. Center Air Vents
J. Audio System
K. Comfort Controls
L. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped)
M. Remote Hatch Release Button (Coupe) or
Remote Trunk Release Button (Convertible/Hardtop)

V. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
W. Parking Brake
X. Glove Box
Y. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
(Located behind the Toe-Board)
Z. Air Bag Off Switch (Located in Glove Box)

N. Ignition Switch

2-77

Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how the
vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have left and many other things
you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages
and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.

United States shown, Canada similar

2-78

Speedometer and Odometer

Tachometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).

There is only one scale for mph and km/h. When you
press the E/M (English/metric) button on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the cluster will calculate the
proper speed and move the needle to the correct position.
Either the MPH or the km/h telltale will illuminate,
depending on which measurement you choose.

Fuel will shut off at about 6200 rpm (6500 rpm for Z06).
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off
rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to operate
your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce your
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.

To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the
parking lamps.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The mileage total of the new
odometer will be set to the original miles (kilometers) of
the old odometer. See your dealer if a new odometer
must be replaced in your vehicle.

2-79

Warning Lights, Gages and Messages
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.

2-80

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a driver information center that
works along with the warning lights and gages.
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
until the driver’s belt
is buckled.

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol. The
system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag
modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see
“Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.

2-81

Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the passenger’s air bag off, this light will
come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has
been turned off. This light will go off when you turn the
air bag back on again. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in
the Index for more on this, including important
safety information.

2-82

CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by the
national government, that person won’t have the
extra protection of an air bag. In a crash, the air
bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect
the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group identified
by the national government. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.

Voltmeter

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The passenger’s air bag could inflate even though
the switch is off. If this ever happens, don’t let
anyone whom the national government has
identified as a member of a passenger air bag
risk group sit in the passenger’s position
(for example, don’t secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced.

When the key is in ON with
the engine not running, the
voltmeter shows the voltage
output of your battery.
When the engine is running,
it shows the voltage output
of the charging system.

The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE
when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading
at 10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable
your vehicle.

2-83

Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
This light should come on
when you turn the ignition
key to START. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there’s a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be a
brake problem. Refer to “Parking Brake” in the Index to
see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have your
brake system inspected right away.

2-84

If the light comes on while you are driving and you have
a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.

CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake warning light is on. Driving with the
brake warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the
road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle
towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section. Also see “Service
ABS” under “Driver Information Center (DIC)
Messages” in the Index.

Traction Control System (TCS) Light
This light should come
on briefly as you start the
engine. If the light doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there’s a problem.

If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message when you’re
driving, there’s a problem with your TCS system and
your vehicle needs service. When this light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. If the driver turns off the Traction Control
System by pressing the button on the console, the
TCS system light will come on and the TRACTION
SYSTEM OFF message will show on the DIC.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-85

Active Handling System Light
The Active Handling System light will come on briefly
as you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem. The light will also come on while the
system warms up and the ACT HNDLING WARMING
UP message will be displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
If it stays on or comes
on while you are
driving, the DIC shows
a SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG message and a
chime sounds, there is a
problem with your
Active Handling
System and your
vehicle needs service.

2-86

The driver can acknowledge this message by pressing
the RESET button. When the SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG message is displayed, the Active Handling
System will not assist you in controlling the vehicle.
You should have the system serviced as soon as
possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVE
HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
If the driver turns off the Active Handling System by
pressing the button on the console, the Active Handling
System light will come on, a chime will sound, and the
TRAC/ACT HNDLG OFF message will be displayed in
the DIC. The Traction Control System will also be
turned off. See “Driver Information Center Messages”
in the Index for more information.
If the Active Handling System and the Traction Control
System are off, pressing the console button momentarily
will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
TRAC/ACT HNDLG ON message, the instrument
cluster light will be off, and a chime will sound. See
“Driver Information Center Messages” in the Index for
more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.

United States

Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, your
engine is too hot.
This means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. (The
larger tic marks are in increments of 30_ below 220_F
(104_C) and in increments of 10_ above 220_F (104_C).)

This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The
CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will
be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent.
This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
more information.

2-87

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:

D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.

D Light On Steady -- An emission control system

NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to
come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

2-88

malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
“Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

2-89

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Engine Oil Pressure Gage

Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

2-90

United States

Canada

The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still be
considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above
the shaded area show the normal operating range.
Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is
low on oil, or that you might have some other oil
problem. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.

CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.

Security Light
This light comes on to
remind you to arm your
theft-deterrent system. If it
comes on and stays on when
your ignition is on, there
may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system.
See “Theft-Deterrent System” and “PASS-Key System”
in the Index.

Check Gages Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine. If the
light comes on and stays on
while you are driving, check
your gages to see if they are
in the warning areas.
This light can come on for the following reasons:
D Low Oil Pressure

D High Coolant Temperature
D High or Low Battery Voltage
D Low Fuel Level
2-91

D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the

Fuel Gage

gage reads F (full).

Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the ignition
is on.

When the needle approaches the red zone, RESERVE
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. When the needle approaches the “E,” LOW FUEL
will appear on the display. At this time, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s). Pressing
RESET will also turn off a DIC message but the LOW
FUEL message will come on again in 10 minutes if you
have not added fuel to the vehicle.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that anything
is wrong with the fuel gage.

2-92

D It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage

reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it took
more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to fit it.
D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
D The gage may not indicate E (empty) when the
ignition is turned off.
D The gage reading may change slightly within the
first several minutes after starting the vehicle.
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
display more detailed fuel information. Each time you
press FUEL, one of the following will appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
D AVERAGE: The fuel economy calculated for the
current tank of fuel, or since you last reset the display.
D INST: The fuel economy calculated for your current
driving conditions.
D RANGE: The distance you can drive before refueling.
D BLANK: The fuel gage is displayed alone.
You should reset the fuel information display every time
you refuel. To reset the display, press FUEL until
AVERAGE appears. Then, press RESET on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).

Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
information about how your vehicle is functioning, as
well as warning messages if a system problem is
detected. The DIC display area is located in the
instrument panel cluster below the speedometer and
tachometer, directly above the steering column.
The following buttons are located on the DIC control panel
which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster.

1 FUEL: Press this button to display fuel information
such as fuel economy and range.
2 GAGES: Use this button to display gage information
like oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature,
automatic transmission fluid temperature, battery
voltage and front/rear tire pressures.
3 TRIP: Use this button to display your total and trip
miles, the elapsed time function, your average speed and
the engine oil life.
4 OPTIONS: This button allows you to choose personal
options that are available on your vehicle, depending on
the options your vehicle is equipped with, such as
security, door locks, easy entry seats and language.
5 E/M: Use this button to change the display between
English and metric units.
RESET: This button, used along with the other buttons,
will reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge
messages on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
At the top of the DIC control buttons is a light sensor.
Be sure not to block the sensor or your lighting
functions may be disrupted.

2-93

DIC Controls and Displays
Turn on the system by turning the ignition to ON. When
you turn on the ignition, the DIC will be in the mode last
displayed when the engine was turned off. Each DIC
button allows you to scroll through a menu. A blank
page ends each menu.
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will appear
on the display. Press RESET to acknowledge any current
warning or service messages. The following pages will
show the messages you can see on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display by pressing the DIC buttons.

1 FUEL
The FUEL button displays average fuel economy and
instantaneous fuel economy calculated for your specific
driving conditions and range.

Press the FUEL button to display average fuel economy,
such as:

D AVERAGE 20.1 MPG or
D AVERAGE 5.3 L/100 km
The average fuel economy is viewed as a long-term
approximation of your overall driving conditions. If you
press RESET in this mode while you’re driving, the
system will begin figuring fuel economy from that
point in time.

2-94

Press FUEL again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:

D INST. 20.1 MPG or
D INST. 5.3 L/100 km

2 GAGES
The GAGES button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.

Press FUEL again to display the range, such as:

D RANGE 20 MI or
D RANGE 32 km
The range calculates the remaining distance you can
drive without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and
the fuel remaining in the tank.
If the range is lower than 30 miles (48 km), the display
will read RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an
average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Resetting
the fuel range causes the fuel economy data to be updated
immediately. Press RESET to reset the fuel range.
Press the GAGE button to display the oil pressure,
such as:

D OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or
D OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
2-95

Press the GAGE button again to display the oil
temperature, such as:

Press the GAGE button again to display the tire pressure
for the front tires, such as:

D OIL TEMP 234 _F or
D OIL TEMP 112 _C

D FRONT L34 R33 PSI or
D FRONT L234 R228 kPa

Press the GAGE button again to display the coolant
temperature, such as:

Press the GAGE button again to display the tire pressure
for the rear tires, such as:

D COOLANT TEMP 123 _F or
D COOLANT TEMP 51 _C

D REAR L34 R33 PSI or
D REAR L234 R228 kPa

Press the GAGE button again to display the automatic
transmission fluid temperature, such as:

Tire pressure is not available until the vehicle has
reached a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more.

D TRANS FLUID 123 _F or
D TRANS FLUID 51 _C
Press the GAGE button again to display the battery
voltage, such as:

D BATTERY VOLTS 13.5

2-96

3 TRIP

Odometer

The TRIP button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.

The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the TRIP
button to display odometer readings such as:

D ODOMETER 12345 MI or
D ODOMETER 20008 km
Without the keys in the ignition, you can also display the
odometer by turning on the parking lamps.
Trip Odometers
There are two trip odometers. Press the TRIP button and
TRIP A will be displayed. Press it again and TRIP B
will be displayed. TRIP A could be used to track the
distance to a destination. TRIP B could be used to track
maintenance periods.

D
D
D
D

TRIP A 130.5 MI or
TRIP A 209.9 km
TRIP B 300.5 MI or
TRIP B 483.5 km

The trip odometers can be reset by pushing the RESET
button on the DIC. Both of the trip odometers can be
used simultaneously.

2-97

Miles Since Last Ignition Feature

Average Speed

You can also display number of miles (kilometers)
driven since you last started the vehicle if you press and
hold the RESET button for two seconds, then release.
The miles (or kilometers) since the last ignition cycle
will be set into the trip odometer.

Press the TRIP button until the average speed is
displayed, such as:

Elapsed Time

Press reset in this mode to start calculating the average
speed. Press and hold RESET to clear.

Press the TRIP button until ELAP. TIME is displayed,
such as ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00.

Engine Oil Life

D AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
D AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h

When the ignition is in ON, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can be used as a stopwatch. The display
can show hours, minutes, seconds and hundredths of
a second. The elapsed time indicator will record up to
99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will reset
to zero and continue counting. (Hundredths are shown
up to 59 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths). The
display appears as ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00 in the
elapsed time function.

Press the TRIP button until the engine oil life is
displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAIN 89%.

You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
RESET. To reset the elapsed time to zero, stop the timer
by pressing RESET. Then press and hold RESET until
ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00 appears in the DIC.

When the oil life is down to zero, you will receive the
message CHANGE OIL NOW.

2-98

This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining useful
life. It will show 99% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert
you with the message CHANGE OIL SOON.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other
than when the oil has just been changed. It can’t be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the system, see “How to Reset the Change Oil
Soon Message” in the Index.
Also, see “Engine Oil, When to Change” and
“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index.

4 OPTIONS
This button allows you to choose personal options that
may be available on your vehicle, depending on the
options your vehicle is equipped with. Some of these
functions work along with the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
When returning to the options menu, the first item of the
options list will always be displayed, not the one you
were last in when you changed buttons.

The following are the options listed under the
OPTIONS button:
Twilight (Optional, Standard in Canada)
Press the OPTIONS button until TWILIGHT - OFF
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following selections:

D TWILIGHT - ON
D TWILIGHT - OFF
2-99

If you choose TWILIGHT - ON, press the OPTIONS
button again to display DELAY TIME 1 2 in the DIC.
Use the OPTIONS button to switch between delay time
1 and 2. You can increase the delay time by pressing
button 1 (1 FUEL) or decrease the time by pressing
button 2 (2 GAGES). Each bar is equal to 12 seconds.
Lock and Arm
Press the OPTIONS button until LOCK & ARM
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following selections:

D
D
D
D

LOCK & ARM - OFF
LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY
LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY
LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS

If you choose LOCK & ARM - OFF, you will receive no
security feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN ONLY, only the
horn will chirp to let you know when your alarm system
has armed when locking your vehicle.

2-100

If you choose LOCK & ARM - LIGHTS ONLY, only
your exterior lamps will flash to let you know when your
alarm system has armed when locking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK & ARM - HORN & LIGHTS, the
horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash briefly
to let you know the system has armed when locking
your vehicle.
Alarm
Press the OPTIONS button until ALARM appears on
the display, then use the RESET button to page through
the following selections:

D ALARM-HORN
D ALARM HORN & LIGHTS
If you choose ALARM-HORN, the horn will sound
during an alarm.
If you choose ALARM HORN & LIGHTS, the horn
will sound and the interior and exterior lamps will flash
during an alarm.

Approach Lights
Press the OPTIONS button until APPROACH LIGHTS
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:

D APPROACH LIGHTS ON
D APPROACH LIGHTS OFF
If you choose APPROACH LIGHTS ON, the fog lamps,
front turn signal, rear back-up and courtesy lamps will
come on for 30 seconds when you press UNLOCK on
the remote keyless entry transmitter. This will occur
only when it is dark outside.
APPROACH LIGHTS OFF turns off this option.

If you choose AUTO LOCK ON, both doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle exceeds 10 mph
(16 km/h) in a manual transmission. In a vehicle with an
automatic transmission, both doors will automatically
lock when you move the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Choose AUTO LOCK OFF to turn this option off.
Auto Unlock
The AUTO UNLOCK will be available only if AUTO
LOCK is set to ON as described previously.
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO UNLOCK
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:

Auto Lock

D AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER
D AUTO UNLOCK BOTH
D AUTO UNLOCK OFF

Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO LOCK appears
on the display, then use the RESET button to page
through the following choices:

If you choose AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER, the driver’s
door will automatically unlock when you turn the
vehicle off and pull the key out of the ignition.

D AUTO LOCK ON
D AUTO LOCK OFF

Choose AUTO UNLOCK BOTH, and both doors will
automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle off and
pull the key out of the ignition.

See “Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System” in the Index
for more information.

AUTO UNLOCK OFF turns off this option.

2-101

Easy Entry
The easy entry feature will only be available if the
vehicle is equipped with the memory option.
Press the OPTIONS button until SEAT EASY ENTRY
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:

D SEAT EASY ENTRY ON
D SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF
If you choose SEAT EASY ENTRY ON, when you turn
the ignition off and remove the key, the seat will
automatically move back and the telescopic steering
wheel (if equipped) will return to its full-forward
position for an easy exit or an easy entrance when
returning to the vehicle.
SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF turns off this option.
Languages
You can select which language the DIC will display its
messages. Press the OPTIONS button until the word
LANGUAGES appears on the display, then use the
RESET button to page through the following choices:

D LANGUAGE ENGLISH
D LANGUAGE FRENCH
2-102

D LANGUAGE GERMAN
D LANGUAGE SPANISH
Blank Page
There is a blank page at the end of the OPTIONS menu.
When the blank page is displayed, you can access the
following items:
FOB TRAINING: This option allows you to match the
RKE transmitter(s) to your vehicle. You can access this
option by pressing and holding RESET for three
seconds while you are on the blank page at the end of
the OPTIONS menu. The message FOB TRAINING
will be displayed. See “Matching Transmitter(s) To Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
TIRE TRAINING (Except Z06): The Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) operates with battery-powered sensors that
are located inside the valve stems on each tire. Each sensor
has a unique ID code so the vehicle knows the tire location
of the sensor. When the vehicle reaches a speed of greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensors begin to send the tire
pressure readings to a receiver inside the vehicle. These
readings are displayed when using the GAGES button on
the DIC. If you are unable to display your tire pressures
while the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h),
you may need to have your sensor ID codes learned by the
vehicle. See your dealer.

DIC Warnings and Messages
The following messages and warnings may appear in the
DIC display. The DIC display area is located in the
instrument panel cluster below the speedometer and
tachometer, directly above the steering column. You may
receive more than one message at a time. Messages will
appear one behind the other. To acknowledge a message
and remove it from the display, press RESET. You may
scroll through the messages that may have been sent at the
same time. The message center is continuously updated
with the vehicle performance status.
ABS ACTIVE (Anti-Lock Brake System Active):
When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE message
will be displayed.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
message will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops adjusting brake pressure.
ACT HNDLG - WARMING UP: When you first start
your vehicle (especially during cold winter weather),
and begin to drive away (up to 6 mph (10 km/h)), the
message ACT HNDLG - WARMING UP may be
displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light
will be on, and a chime will sound. This is normal.
You can acknowledge this message by pressing the

RESET button. The Active Handling System
performance is affected until the next message WARM
UP COMPLETE is displayed in the DIC.
During hot or cold temperature conditions, this message
may be displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph
(20 kph) for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System is off
until the WARM UP COMPLETE message is displayed.
WARM UP COMPLETE: If you receive this message
and hear a chime, the system has completed the
functional check of the Active Handling System.
TRAC/ACT HNDLG - ON: If the Traction Control and
Active Handling Systems are off, depressing the Active
Handling System console button momentarily will turn
both systems on. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG - ON
will be displayed temporarily in the DIC, the instrument
panel cluster light will be off and a chime will sound.
TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF: By pressing the Active
Handling System console button briefly, the driver can
turn the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems
off. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG - OFF will be
displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light
will be on and a chime will sound. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the RESET button. The anti-lock
brake systems remains on with the Traction Control and
Active Handling Systems off. You should adjust your
driving accordingly.

2-103

COMPETITIVE DRIVING: When the Competitive
Driving mode is selected, this message will be displayed
in the DIC. The instrument panel cluster light will not be
on when the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The
Traction Control System will not be operating while in
the Competitive Driving mode. You should adjust your
driving accordingly.
SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): If the
SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you are driving,
stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the message stays
on, or comes back on again while you are driving, your
vehicle is in need of service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system light is also on,
you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with
your brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, your
traction control system and the optional active handling
system will also be disabled. The driver information
center will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS,
SERVICE TRACTION SYS and SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG, and the instrument cluster car icon will be
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge these messages
by pressing the reset button three times.

2-104

When the service message is displayed the computer
controlled systems will not assist the driver and you
should have the system repaired as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE COLUMN LOCK
(Manual Transmission Only): If the system that
controls the locking and unlocking of the steering
column does not work properly, have the vehicle towed
to a dealer for service.
PULL KEY - WAIT 10 SEC: If this message comes on,
the steering column lock system has detected a problem
while engaging the steering column lock. This message may
occur when the ignition key is removed and reinserted
before the steering column lock system fully locks or
unlocks the steering column. To acknowledge that you have
read this message, and to clear it from the display, remove
the ignition key and wait 10 seconds before reinserting the
key into the ignition. If you attempt to operate your vehicle
without removing the key for 10 seconds, the vehicle’s fuel
system will shut off when you reach 1.5 mph (2.4 km/h).
If the message stays on after removing the key and waiting
10 seconds, have your vehicle taken to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair.

LOW OIL PRESSURE: You will hear four chimes and
the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a
chime every minute until the vehicle is serviced. If you
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the
digital display until the vehicle is serviced.
Low oil pressure may be the result of a combination of
low oil level and abrupt changes in the vehicle’s
direction. When this warning is displayed, you should
not operate the engine at high rpm or make fast abrupt
moves. As soon as possible, you should check the oil
level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
LOW OIL LEVEL: Press RESET to acknowledge that
you have read the message and to remove it from the
display. The message will reappear every 10 minutes
until this condition changes.
You will hear two chimes when this message is
displayed. If this message appears after starting your
engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may
need to add oil. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

REDUCED ENGINE POWER: You will hear chimes
continuously when this message is displayed. To
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display, press RESET.
The message will reappear every 15 seconds until this
condition changes.
If the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message and the
CHECK ENGINE light comes on, a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur. If the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the
CHECK ENGINE light stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized Chevrolet dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Also, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”
(Check Engine Light) in the Index. If the REDUCED
ENGINE POWER message is displayed in combination
with the COOLANT OVER TEMP message, see
“Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-105

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: If this message appears
on the DIC, there may be an electrical or another system
problem with your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked
by your dealer if this message keeps appearing.

TRACTION SYSTEM - ON: This message is
displayed when you decide to turn on the Traction
Control System by pressing the switch on the console.
This message will shut off automatically on its own.

CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: Press RESET to
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display. The message will reappear
every 10 minutes until this condition changes. You will
hear two chimes when this message is displayed.

TRACTION SYSTEM - OFF: You will hear a single
quick tone when this message is displayed. This message
comes on and stays on when the Traction Control System
button on the console is pressed to turn the system off.
To acknowledge this message, press RESET.

If this message comes on while you are driving, you may
have a problem with the electrical charging system. It
could indicate that you have a loose or broken drive belt or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM: If the SERVICE
TRACTION SYS message is displayed when you are
driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control
System and your vehicle is in need of service. When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
TRACTION SYS ACTIVE: When your Traction
Control System is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION
SYS ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
stops limiting wheel spin.

2-106

If you have the optional Active Handling System, the
SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message will also be
displayed and the instrument cluster car icon will also be
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge both messages
by pressing the reset button two times which will also
turn off the instrument cluster icon. When the service
messages are displayed, the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver in controlling the
vehicle. Have the system repaired as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.

SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message is
used to indicate to the driver that the Selective Real Time
Damping (SRTD) system has detected a malfunction and
that the system must be serviced. The SERVICE RIDE
CONTROL message will always come on when a failure
is detected by the Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD)
system. If a fault is present in the SRTD which causes the
shocks to be in their full soft condition, the SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE and
MAXIMUM 80 MPH (129 km/h) will display together.
You will never get a SHOCKS INOPERATIVE and
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) message
without a SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE: You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge that
you have read the message and to remove it from the
display, press RESET. The message will reappear every
10 minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that a malfunction is present in the
Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD) system which is
causing the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a
warning to the driver that the vehicle handling may be
affected. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h): You will
hear four chimes when this message is displayed. To
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press
RESET, a message will reappear every 10 minutes until
this condition changes.
This message indicates that the vehicle speed will be
limited to 80 mph (129 km/h) when the shock absorber
system has failed and the shocks are in their full soft
mode. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
COOLANT OVER TEMP: You will hear four chimes
and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a
chime every minute until this condition changes. If you
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the
digital display until the condition changes.
If the engine coolant exceeds 255_F (124_C), this
message is displayed. If you have been operating your
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off from the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. You can monitor the coolant
temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC or the
engine coolant gage on the instrument panel cluster. See
“Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-107

REDUCE ENGINE RPM: You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the
warning, press the RESET button. After you press the
RESET button, a message will be displayed and you
will hear a chime every minute until this condition
changes. If you do not press RESET, the message will
remain on the digital display until the condition changes.
If the engine oil temperature exceeds 320_F (160_C),
this message is displayed. You should check the engine
coolant temperature and engine oil level. If your engine
is too hot, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Your
vehicle may need service, so see your dealer. You can
monitor the oil temperature with the GAGES button on
the DIC.
HIGH TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission
Only): You will hear four chimes when this message is
displayed. To acknowledge this warning, press the RESET
button. After you press the RESET button, the message
will be displayed every 10 minutes until the condition
changes. If you do not press RESET, the message remains
on the display until the condition changes.
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
270_F (132_C) or rises rapidly, this message is
displayed. The transmission may shift gears or apply the
torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid temperature.
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can cause

2-108

the transmission fluid temperature to be higher than
normal. If this message appears, you may continue to
drive at a slower speed. You should also monitor the
transmission fluid temperature and allow it to cool to at
least 230_F (110_C). The transmission fluid temperature
can be monitored with the GAGES button on the DIC.
See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. You
should also check the engine coolant temperature. If it is
also hot, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
If the HIGH TRANS TEMP message is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
need service. See your dealer for an inspection.
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING: If the SERVICE
ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed, there is a
problem with your Active Handling System and your
vehicle needs service. The instrument cluster light will
also be on and a chime will sound. When this message is
displayed, the system is not working. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
ACTIVE HANDLING: Your vehicle is equipped with
a computer controlled system to assist the driver in
controlling the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
You may feel or hear the system working and see the
ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC.
This is normal when the system is operating. Also see
“Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE: (Except Z06)
You will hear two chimes when this message is
displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press RESET.
After you press RESET, a message will appear every
10 minutes until this condition changes. This message
indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is less
than 25 psi (172 kPa). Next to the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE message, you can see either LF (left front),
LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to
indicate to you which tire is low on pressure. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read other messages that may have been sent at the
same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your
Tire Loading Information Label. See “Extended
Mobility Tires” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in
the Index.

CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when
the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.

2-109

FLAT TIRE: (Except Z06) You will hear two chimes
when this message is displayed followed by the message
MAX SPEED 55 MPH (90 km/h). If this message
appears, do not drive your vehicle above these limits.
The next message to appear is REDUCED HANDLING.
Adjust your driving accordingly. To acknowledge these
warnings, press RESET. After you press RESET, a
message will reappear every 10 minutes until this
condition changes. This message indicates that the
pressure in one of your tires is lower than 5 psi (34 kPa).
Next to the FLAT TIRE message, you can see either
LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or
RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is flat.
You can receive more than one tire pressure message at
a time. To read other messages that may have been sent
at the same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown
on your Tire Loading Information Label. See “Extended
Mobility Tires” and “Tire Inflation” in the Index.

2-110

HIGH TIRE PRESSURE - (LF, LR, RF, RR)
(Except Z06): You will hear two chimes when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will
reappear every 10 minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that the pressure in one of your
tires is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa). Next to the
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE message, you can see either
LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or
RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is higher
than 42 psi (290 kPa). You can receive more than one
tire pressure message at a time. To read other messages
that may have been sent at the same time, press RESET.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label.
See “Extended Mobility Tires” and “Tire Inflation” in
the Index.

SERVICE TIRE MON SYS (Except Z06): If this
message comes on, a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) is not working properly. If you drive your
vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or
inoperable, the warning will come on in approximately
10 minutes. If all four sensors are missing, the warning
will come on in approximately 15 to 20 minutes. (All
the sensors would be missing, for example, if you put
different wheels on your vehicle without transferring the
sensors.) If the warning comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the TPM. See your dealer.

2-111

Other Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have come
on at the same time, press the RESET button.

D BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT

(Automatic Transmissions Only)

D CHANGE OIL NOW (See “GM Oil Life Systemt”
in the Index.)

D CHANGE OIL SOON (See “GM Oil Life Systemt”
in the Index.)

D CRUISE DISENGAGED (See “Cruise Control” in
the Index.)

D CRUISE SET __ MPH (__ km/h)

(See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

D DOOR AJAR

2-112

D
D
D
D

ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM
HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
HIGH VOLTAGE (See “Voltmeter” in the Index.)
LOW BRAKE FLUID
(See “Brake Fluid” in the Index.)

D LOW FUEL (See “Fuel Gage” in the Index.)
D LOW VOLTAGE (See “Voltmeter” in the Index.)
D LOW WASHER FLUID (See “Windshield Washer
Fluid” in the Index.)

D
D
D
D

RESERVE FUEL (See “Fuel Gage” in the Index.)
TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible/Z06)
UPSHIFT NOW
(See “Manual Transmission” in the Index.)

Head-Up Display (Option)
CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it’s dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display
(HUD), you can see some of the driver information that
appears on your instrument panel cluster.

The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward the
front of your vehicle. The HUD consists of the
following information:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Speedometer
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Tachometer
Oil, Temperature and Fuel Gages
Shift Light (Performance SHIFT Light)
This light is used for performance driving to indicate
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been
reached to shift the transmission into the next higher
gear. The SHIFT light will display at an engine
speed of about 5,750 rpm, just prior to reaching the
engine fuel cut-off mode. To better understand the
vehicle’s power curves, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.

D Check Gages Icon

2-113

There are five HUD selections that you can choose to
view in the HUD display. By pressing and holding the
PAGE button, you can scroll through these pages in the
following order:

D
D
D
D
D

Speed Only
Speed and Gage
Speed, Tachometer and Gage
Speed and Tachometer
Tachometer Only

When you have chosen the desired HUD display, release
the PAGE button.
Gages can be scrolled through by tapping the PAGE
button (only when a gage is displayed). The gages
shown are the following:

D Oil Pressure
D Coolant Temperature
D Fuel Level
The selections that you choose will remain in the
HUD display until they are changed.

2-114

Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls and
driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES icon will illuminate in
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)
for more information.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly:
1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control
all the way up.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
the light conditions in the direction your vehicle is
facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control
set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily
shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that you are
entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD causing
all of the graphics to light up. The display will return
to normal when the sunlight is no longer entering
the HUD.
The HUD controls are located to the left of the
steering wheel.

2. Adjust the seat to your driving position. If you
change your seat position later, you may have to
re-adjust your HUD.
3. Press the DISPLAY switch up or down to center the
HUD image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
4. Slide the dimmer control downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary. To turn HUD
off, slide the switch to OFF.

2-115

If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may need
to adjust the HUD brightness again using the dimmer
control. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD
image harder to see.
To change from English to metric units, push the
E/M button located to the right of the steering wheel.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of
the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.

2-116

If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,
check to see if:

D
D
D
D

Something is covering the HUD unit.
The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
Ambient light (in the direction your vehicle is
facing) is low.

D A fuse is blown. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in
the Index.

Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
system. If you ever have to have your windshield
replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or
your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13

Comfort Controls
Manual Comfort Controls
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate
Control System (Option)
Sensors
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control

3-18
3-22
3-27
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-32

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (Option)
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06)
Power Antenna Mast Care (Convertible)
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas (Coupe)

3-1

Comfort Controls

Temperature Knob

This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you.

The center knob controls the temperature of the air
coming through the system. Turn it counterclockwise
(toward the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it clockwise
(toward the red area) for warmer air.

With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.

Manual Comfort Controls

Mode Knob
The right knob selects the location of where the air will
enter the vehicle.
UPPER: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets with a very small
amount of air directed to the lower outlets.
BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into the
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.

Fan Knob
The left knob controls the force of air you want.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed or
counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. The fan must be
turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.

3-2

LOWER: This setting directs most of the air
through the lower ducts to the floor area of the vehicle
with some of the air also directed toward the windshield
and side window vents.

DEFOG: This setting divides the air between the
windshield and lower outlets with a small amount of air
directed toward the side window vents. This is useful
when fog appears on the windshield or side glass due to
rain or snowy conditions.
DEFROST: Use this setting to quickly remove fog
or frost from the windshield. This setting directs most of
the airflow to the windshield with a small amount of air
directed toward the lower and side window outlets.
Mode Buttons
These buttons control the air intake, the air conditioning
and the rear window defogger operation.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button and it
will bring outside air into the vehicle. The light on the
button will come on when operating. Use this setting
while trying to defrost or defog windows to help
clear moisture.
RECIRCULATE: Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering the vehicle by
recirculating most of the air inside the vehicle. The light
on the button will come on when operating. This setting
is helpful when you are trying to cool the air quickly or
to limit odors entering the vehicle. Recirculate cannot be
used while in the DEFROST or DEFOG modes.

Operating the system in the recirculation mode may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the
system to either the DEFOG or DEFROST mode and
increase the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the
windows, operate the system in the OUTSIDE
AIR mode.
A/C: This button turns the air conditioning
compressor off or on under most conditions. The light
on the A/C button comes on when the compressor is
operating. The air conditioning does not operate at
temperatures below approximately 35_F to 40_F
(2_C to 4_C). The air conditioning cools and
dehumidifies the air coming into the vehicle. The air
conditioning cannot be turned off in DEFROST, as it
helps to remove moisture from the vehicle. It also helps
to keep the windows clear.
The air conditioning may be forced off at high engine
speeds or high engine oil or coolant temperatures.
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for
more information.

3-3

Automatic Electronic Dual Climate
Control System (Option)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an Automatic
Electronic Dual Climate Control System. This system
can automatically adjust and control temperature output,
fan speed, air delivery mode, air conditioning operation
and air intake. You can use the AUTO (automatic)
setting or override the automatic operation with manual
control settings. The set temperature will be
remembered each time you turn the ignition off and
restart in the same settings. You can use the memory
option to recall your settings. See “Memory” in
the Index.

3-4

Digital Display
The digital display shows readings in Fahrenheit or
Celsius by pressing the E/M button (English/Metric) on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). When you start
the vehicle, the display will show the current fan speed,
air delivery mode and the driver-set temperature
for approximately five seconds and then show the
outside temperature.
When the system is fully in the automatic mode, the
word AUTO will also appear on the display unless you
are in full cold 60_F (16_C) or full hot 90_F (32_C),
then the word AUTO will not display. If you have
selected a manual fan speed, then the fan symbol will
appear on the display. If a manual air delivery mode has
been selected, the delivery mode symbol will appear on
the display.
Driver Set Temperature Knob
The DRIVER knob changes the temperature on the
driver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase the temperature and
counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.
Whenever you turn this knob, the temperature will be
displayed for approximately five seconds along with the
current fan speed and air delivery mode.

When adjusting the temperature, start with a driver-set
temperature of 73_F (23_C) until you determine
your comfort zone. If you choose 60_F (16_C), the
system will remain at maximum cooling and will not
automatically adjust fan speed or air delivery. If you
choose 90_F (32_C), the system will remain at
maximum heating and will not automatically adjust fan
speed or air delivery. Choosing either maximum setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
Turning the knob past either maximum setting has no
effect on the operation of the system.

Automatic Operation

Passenger Temperature Offset

A Typical Cold Weather Example:

The PASSENGER knob changes the temperature on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. When the knob is in the
12 o’clock position, the passenger’s temperature is the
same as the driver’s. Turn the knob clockwise for warmer
air on the passenger’s side, counterclockwise for cooler air.
If the driver-set temperature is set at 60_F (16_C) or
90_F (32_C), turning the passenger knob has no effect
because the system is locked at a maximum setting.

Your vehicle has been parked outside overnight in cold
weather below 32_F (0_C) and you have set the
driver temperature at 73_F (23_C) and have selected
the AUTO mode. The system will automatically adjust
the temperature output to maximum heating. The fan
will start at a low speed. This is to avoid blowing cold
air into the vehicle. The length of the delay depends on
the amount of time since the engine was last started, the
outside temperature and the engine coolant temperature.
As the coolant warms up, the fan speed will gradually
increase. Air will flow to the floor with some air to
the windshield to prevent fogging under most
normal conditions.

Press the AUTO button to place the entire system in the
automatic mode. After a five-second display of the
current settings, only the word AUTO and the outside
temperature will be shown on the digital display unless
you are in full cold 60_F (16_C) or full hot 90_F
(32_C), then the word AUTO will not display. The
system will operate to achieve your comfort set
temperature as quickly as possible. The AUTO control
system works best with the windows up and the
removable roof installed or the convertible top up.

3-5

As the interior of the vehicle warms up to your comfort
set temperature, the fan speed will decrease and the
temperature output may become cooler. If the interior
temperature continues to warm up due to heating from
the sun or outside temperature increases, the system
may switch to other air delivery modes (typically
DEFOG or BI-LEVEL).
A Typical Hot Weather Example:
The vehicle has been parked outside all day in hot
weather above 80_F (27_C) and you have set the driver
temperature at 73_F (23_C) and have selected the
AUTO mode. The system will automatically adjust the
temperature output to maximum cooling. The fan will
start at a low speed momentarily to push the hot air to
the floor of the vehicle and then go to a higher fan speed
with cold airflow out of the instrument panel outlets. A
small amount of airflow will continue through the lower
ducts to cool the floor area.

3-6

The air intake may start in the recirculated mode for
maximum cooling performance. As the interior of the
vehicle cools down to your comfort set temperature,
the fan speed will decrease and the temperature output
may become warmer. The air intake may shift from
recirculation to outside air mode. If the interior
continues to cool due to a decrease in the amount of heat
the vehicle is absorbing from the sun or a decrease in the
outside temperature, the system could switch to other air
delivery modes (typically BI-LEVEL or DEFOG).
Manual Settings
With the automatic electronic dual climate control
system, there are several manual settings you can use to
control the system and override the AUTO operation.
You can program the fan speed, air delivery mode, air
intake mode and control the air conditioning operation
using these settings. The system will still determine the
temperature output level based on the driver-set
temperature and the passenger temperature offset.

FAN SPEED: Press the button with the fan symbol
on it to manually lock in the current fan speed and to
stop the automatic fan speed control. Pressing the
arrows will delete AUTO from the digital display. The
fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be shown. To
increase the fan speed so that more air flows into the
vehicle, press the UP arrow on the fan switch. To
decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the DOWN
arrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to
the automatic fan control.
MODE: Press the MODE button to manually lock in the
current air delivery setting and to stop the automatic
mode control. Pressing the MODE button will delete
AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics
will be shown. To change the setting, press the MODE
button again. The AUTO button must be pressed to
return to the automatic mode selection.
UPPER: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets and a very small
amount to the lower outlets.

LOWER: This setting directs most of the air to
the floor area and some of it toward the windshield and
side window vents.
DEFOG: This setting divides the air between
the windshield and lower outlets and a small amount
toward the side window vents. This is useful when fog
appears on the windshield or side glass due to rain or
snowy conditions.
Function Buttons
These buttons control climate control ON/OFF, air
intake, front defrost, rear defrost and the air
conditioning operation.
OFF: Press the OFF button to turn off the climate
control system. This is the only setting that fully shuts
off the fan. The digital display will show only the
outside temperature. You can still adjust the driver set
temperature, the passenger temperature offset and the
air intake mode while in OFF.

BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into the
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.

3-7

A/C: This button turns the air conditioning
compressor off or on under most conditions. The light
on the A/C button will come on when the compressor is
operating in either the automatic or manual mode. The
air conditioning does not operate at temperatures below
approximately 35_F to 40_F (2_C to 4_C). The light
on the A/C button will flash if pressed when air
conditioning is not available. The air conditioning cools
and dehumidifies the air coming into the vehicle. The air
conditioning cannot be turned off in DEFROST and
DEFOG, as it helps to remove moisture from the
vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.
If the system is operating in the AUTO mode, turning
the air conditioning off will delete AUTO from the
digital display and show current mode and fan settings.
The AUTO button must be pressed to return to the
automatic mode operation.
The air conditioning may be forced off at high engine
speeds or high engine oil or coolant temperatures.

OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to provide
outside air. The light on this air intake button will come
on to show when it is operating. When in the AUTO
mode, the system automatically selects OUTSIDE AIR
instead of recirculate, as required, to control the
temperature in the vehicle. By pressing OUTSIDE AIR,
the system will lock into the outside air mode. Any
adjustment to the air intake must then be made
manually. OUTSIDE AIR should be used when trying to
defrost or defog windows to help reduce moisture inside
of the vehicle.
RECIRCULATE: Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering the vehicle. The light on
this air intake button will come on to show when it is
operating. Recirculate is helpful when you are trying to
cool the air quickly or trying to limit odors and dust
from entering the vehicle. When in the AUTO mode,
the system automatically selects recirculate to cool the
vehicle’s temperature. By pressing this button, the
system will lock into the recirculated air mode.
Any adjustment to the air intake must then be made
manually. Recirculation is not available when using the
defrost or defog mode because outside air is need to
reduce moisture inside of the vehicle.

3-8

Operating the system in the recirculation mode may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the
system to either the DEFOG or DEFROST mode and
increase the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the
windows, operate the system in the OUTSIDE
AIR mode.
FRONT: Press the FRONT defrost button to
quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. This
setting directs most of the airflow to the windshield and
a small amount toward the lower and side window
outlets. The light on the button will come on and the
digital display will show the defrost mode symbol and
fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used.
Pressing FRONT defrost again will return the system to
the last operating mode and the air intake mode will be
in OUTSIDE AIR.

Sensors
The automatic electronic dual climate control system
uses several sensors to control operation and
display information.
Solar Load Sensor
This sensor is located on the top right side of the
defroster grille. The defroster grille is on the top of
the instrument panel.
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation and uses
this information as part of the automatic climate control
system when operating in the AUTO mode.
Be careful not to put anything over the sensor. When
covered, the sensor cannot compensate for changes in
the amount of heat the vehicle is absorbing from the sun.

If the system is in FRONT defrost when you shut the
engine off, it will restart in FRONT defrost unless the
engine is off for longer than 40 minutes. If the engine is
off longer than 40 minutes, the system will restart in the
operating mode you had set prior to FRONT defrost and
the air intake mode will be in OUTSIDE AIR.
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for
more information.

3-9

Outside Air Temperature Sensor
This sensor is located in the air intake under the front
bumper of the vehicle. Information from this sensor
is used for the outside air temperature readings
shown on the digital display for the automatic climate
control system.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
temperature will not change until:

D The vehicle’s speed is above 16 mph (26 km/h) for
one and a half minutes.

D The vehicle’s speed is above 45 mph (72 km/h) for
one minute.

These delays help prevent false readings. If the
temperature goes down, the outside temperature display
is updated immediately.
If the vehicle has been turned off for more than three
hours, the current outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.

3-10

Inside Temperature Sensor
This sensor is located to the left of the ignition switch.
The automatic climate control system uses this sensor to
receive information, so if you block or cover it, the
system will not function properly.

Air Conditioning
On very hot days, the vehicle will cool down more
quickly and economically if you open the windows long
enough to let hot inside air escape. Then keep the
windows closed in order to allow the air conditioning to
work best. Maximum cooling will occur when the
recirculate setting is operating, airflow direction is in the
upper mode, and the temperature knob (on a manual
climate control system) is turned all the way to the blue
area. These settings will be selected by the automatic
electronic dual climate control system if operating in
AUTO when maximum cooling is required.
When the air conditioning is on, you may
sometimes notice slight changes in the vehicle’s engine
performance and power. This is normal. The system is
designed to help fuel economy while maintaining the
desired cooling level.
The air conditioning removes moisture from the air,
so you may notice water dripping from under the
vehicle when it is idling or after it has been turned off.
This is normal.

Heating

Defogging and Defrosting

The heater works best if you keep the windows closed.
Maximum heating will occur when airflow direction is
in the lower mode and the temperature knob (on a
manual climate control system) is all the way in the red
area. These settings will be selected by the automatic
electronic dual climate control system if operating in
AUTO when maximum heating is required.

To rapidly defrost the windshield, the FRONT defrost
mode (automatic electronic dual climate control system)
or defrost mode (manual control system) should be used
and the fan speed should be adjusted to the highest
speed. With the manual control system, turn the
temperature knob all the way to the red area.

The BI-LEVEL setting is designed for use on sunny
days when the air is only moderately warm or cool.
On days like these, the sun may adequately warm
your upper body, but your lower body may not be
warm enough. The BI-LEVEL setting will direct
cooler airflow to your upper body and warmer air to the
floor area.
If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use
it during cold weather 0_F (-18_C) or lower, the
heating system will provide heat more quickly because
the coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.

To keep the windshield clear and provide heated air to
the floor area of the vehicle, use the DEFOG setting.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
vents located near the side rearview mirrors.

Rear Window Defogger
REAR: This button turns the rear defogger and the
heated outside mirrors on. The light on the button will
come on when operating. The system automatically
shuts off after approximately 15 minutes. If further
defogging is desired, press the button again and it will
operate for about seven and a half more minutes.
The rear window defogger operates only when the
engine is running.

3-11

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window. Do not attach
anything like a temporary vehicle license or a decal
across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something sharp on
the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running.
Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.

3-12

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan to the highest speed for a few moments before
driving off. This helps clear the intake outlets of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of the windows.

D Keep the area around the base of the center instrument

panel console and air path under the seats clear of
objects. This helps air circulate throughout the vehicle.

Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is off. See “Retained
Accessory Power” in the Index.

Setting the Clock
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears.
Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control

SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station

Your vehicle is equipped with six BoseR amplified
speakers. See your dealer for details.

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.

Playing the Radio

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.

PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of turning continuously.

SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the
next higher or lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.

RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.

3-13

SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.

2. Press AM FM to select the band.

P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that
pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press P.SCAN
or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. P.SCAN
will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the P.SCAN
mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear
momentarily just before the frequency is displayed. In
FM mode, this function will scan through both FM1 and
FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will appear on
the display.

3. Tune in the desired station.

Setting the Tone

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.

BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-14

TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE
button to program AUTO TONE for station presets.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise for the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. If a tape is inserted when the ignition is on but
the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown in the center of the graphic display
whenever a tape is inserted. When a tape is active, the
tape symbol will be accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do
for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the
tape is playing.
If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may
not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and
start over.

3-15

The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and
will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or
CrO2 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is
inserted, the top side is selected to play first.
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection on the tape if the current
selection has been playing for less than eight seconds.
If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection
has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go
to the beginning of the current selection. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction
arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. The
sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. Press
this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to
normal play.
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side
of the tape.

3-16

NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses.

(5): Press this button to reduce background noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances.

AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
If your system is equipped with a remote playback
device, pressing this button a second time will allow the
remote device to play.

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a
cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it
may become warm.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power
up the radio and begin playing.

3-17

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (Option)

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player and Automatic Tone Control, are six Bose
amplified speakers. See your dealer for details.

RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station

Playing the Radio

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.

PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of turning continuously.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.

3-18

SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the
next higher or lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.

SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.

2. Press AM FM to select the band.

P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the
tuner is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number
(P1 through P6) will appear momentarily just before
the frequency is displayed. In FM mode, this function
will scan through both FM1 and FM2 preset stations
and FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display.

3. Tune in the desired station.

Setting the Tone

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.

BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise
to decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-19

TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and
AUTO TONE button to program AUTO TONE for
station presets.

3-20

Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise for the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The
display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
RECALL or EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear on
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display.
When the road becomes smooth or the temperature
returns to normal, the disc should play. If the disc comes
out, it could be one of the following:

D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)

PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show on
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM is reset to off when the disc is ejected.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold the button or
press it more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage easily.
(5): This button has no function when playing a
compact disc.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Release it to resume playing. You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage easily.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track
number also appears when a new track starts to play.

3-21

AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player. The letters CD will go off the display.

Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trunk-mounted

CD AUX: Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on
the display when the disc is in the player, whether it is
active or not. If your system is equipped with a remote
playback device, pressing this button a second time will
allow the remote device to play.

CD changer. It is located in the rear center storage
compartment. See “Rear Storage Compartments” in the
Index for more information.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play. The disc will start at the first track when you
reinsert it.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it
was stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove the
disc, the player will pull the disc back in to protect it
after about one minute. If you leave a compact disc
in the player while listening to the radio, it may
become warm.

3-22

If your vehicle has a compact disc changer, you can play
up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be
played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The
small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.

NOTICE:
Heavy objects in the center storage area which
may shift or slide while driving could damage
your CD changer. Protect your CD changer by
not placing heavy, moveable objects in the center
storage area.

You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one
disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.
If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up
to 12 discs in the magazine.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on top of the magazine.

3-23

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD symbol will appear on the radio display.
If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the
CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is
ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a disc and
track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are
listed on the front of the magazine.
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with the
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control

Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the
changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.
This will continue for up to two minutes depending on
the number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.

3-24

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control, the
following buttons are used for the trunk-mounted CD
changer except the EJECT button for ejecting the
CD magazine.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc. The disc
number and track number will be displayed.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold the button or
press it more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
(5): This button has no function when playing a
compact disc.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.

TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
To eject the disc holder in the trunk-mounted CD
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and
the disc holder will automatically eject.
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer with
the AM-FM Stereo with CD Player and Automatic
Tone Control
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
CD Player and Automatic Tone Control, the following
buttons are used for the trunk-mounted CD changer
except the EJECT button for ejecting the CD magazine.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

3-25

RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

To eject the disc holder in the trunk-mounted CD
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and
the disc holder will automatically eject.

NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold the button or
press it more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.

Compact Disc Changer Errors

REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
(5): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number
and track number will be displayed.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in
the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a compact
disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a
compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch
between the trunk-mounted CD changer and compact
disc if both are loaded.

3-26

If an error occurs while trying to play a CD in the
compact disc changer, the following conditions may
have caused the error:

D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.

D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side up.

D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)

D The CD changer door is open. Completely close the
changer door to restore normal operation.

D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.

Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of
the trays.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.

1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

3. Turn the radio off.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.

5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume control will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.

3-27

Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

3-28

Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.

Understanding Radio Reception

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably

The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

and clearly.

NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
also interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-29

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use
the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If
you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.

2. Turn the radio off.

The recommended cleaning method for your
cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.

3-30

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06)
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the rear quarter panel.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

3-31

Power Antenna Mast Care (Convertible)
Your power antenna will look its best and work well
if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the
antenna mast:
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.
3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing
any dirt.
4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio or ignition off and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.

NOTICE:
Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.

3-32

NOTICE:
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off
your radio to make the power antenna go down.
This will prevent the mast from possibly getting
damaged. If the antenna does not go down when
you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the
antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can
replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit and
follow the instructions in the kit.

Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas (Coupe)
The antennas in your vehicle are located in the
windshield and the rear window. The connectors are at
the top of the windshield and the top of the rear window
above the rear window defogger.

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17

Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Traction Control System (TCS)
Active Handling System
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night

4-19
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-27
4-31
4-32
4-33

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing A Trailer

4-1

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.

4-2

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.

Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.

Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle. Also see “Traction Control System
(TCS)” and “Active Handling System” in the Index.

4-6

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s
what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-8

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear a
motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal move a
little during a stop, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION SYS ACTIVE message will come on
when the TCS system is limiting wheel spin. See
“Traction Sys Active Message” in the Index. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.

4-9

The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and the
TCS warning light will
come on to let you know if
there’s a problem with your
TCS system. See “Service
Traction System Message”
in the Index.

When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

4-10

The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TCS system off if you
ever need to.
To turn the system off, press
the button located on the
console. You can turn the
system ON or OFF at any
time by pressing the TCS
switch. The DIC will
display the appropriate
message when you push
the button.

Active Handling System
The Active Handling System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away (6 mph (10 km/h)), the message ACT HNDLG
WARMING UP may be displayed in the DIC, the
instrument cluster light will be on, and a chime will
sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this
message by pressing the RESET button. The Active
Handling System performance is affected until the
message, WARM UP COMPLETE, is displayed in
the DIC.
The ACT HNDLG WARMING UP message may be
displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h)
for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System is off until
the WARM UP COMPLETE message is displayed.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when
the system is operating. See “Driver Information Center
Messages” in the Index for more information. You may
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.

The SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG message will be
displayed, the instrument
cluster light will come on,
and a chime will sound to
let you know if there is a
problem with the system.
See “Driver Information
Center Messages” in the
Index for more information.
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG
message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The Active Handling System comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. To help maintain
directional control of the vehicle, you should always
leave the system on. You can turn the system off if you
ever need to. If you turn the Active Handling System
off, the Traction Control System will also be turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off, press the ACTIVE HANDLING
button on the console. You can turn the system on
and off at any time by pressing the button. The DIC
will display the appropriate message when you push
the button.

4-11

Competitive Driving Mode

Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering

The driver can select the optional handling mode by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the
console for more than five seconds. Competitive
Driving mode allows the driver to have full control of
the rear wheels while the Active Handling System helps
steer the vehicle by selective brake application. The
instrument cluster light will not be on. The Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at
all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking yet a
firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button
again, or turn the ignition to ACC, the Active Handling
and Traction Control Systems will be on. The
TRAC/ACT HNDLG-ON message will be displayed
temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

4-12

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems --steering
and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires
meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
Refer to “Traction Control System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-13

Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-14

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides

and to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to

pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

4-15

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and

start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.

4-16

If your TCS system is off, then an acceleration skid
is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.

Driving at Night

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.

4-17

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to

slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re

4-18

driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.

4-19

CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-20

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could
drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and
otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps -- to help make you more visible
to others.

D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See “Tires”
in the Index.

4-21

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic

light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

4-22

Freeway Driving

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

4-23

The exit speed is usually posted.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook

4-24

recommended pressure?
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,
or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.

4-25

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.

CAUTION:

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
D

D
D

4-26

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.

4-27

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. If your vehicle has the optional Active
Handling System, it may also activate. See “Traction
Control System” and “Active Handling System” in
the Index.

4-28

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-29

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-30

CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.

4-31

Loading Your Vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation. It
also gives you important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight
that you can carry. This weight is called Vehicle
Capacity Weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all non-factory-installed options.

4-32

The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’t carry more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in the
rear area.

CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.

NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
D Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.

Towing a Trailer
Your Corvette is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.

4-33

Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-8

Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating

5-11
5-18
5-20
5-26

Cooling System
If a Tire Goes Flat
Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Models Only)
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Press this button to
make your front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on
and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, push the button again.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

5-2

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do
it safely.

CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-3

2. Get the vehicles close enough so that the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory plug. Turn off all lamps that
aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio.

5-4

NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each.

CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a body metal surface.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts, too. And don’t connect negative (-) to
negative (-) on the dead battery, as this can
cause sparks.

CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.

5-5

7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-6

8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step.

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

9. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go
to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(46 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move. The electrical connection is
just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

5-7

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode

1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle
that had the dead battery.

Should an overheated engine condition exist and the
messages COOLANT OVER TEMP and REDUCED
ENGINE POWER are displayed, along with the Check
Engine light, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in
power and engine performance. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).

2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from
the negative terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.

Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
the Index.

Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the
instrument cluster and a COOLANT OVER TEMP
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

5-8

NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

5-9

NOTICE:

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D Climb a long hill on a hot day.
D Stop after high-speed driving.
D Idle for long periods in traffic.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ) or
THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-10

Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank

5-11

CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-12

NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.

NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge
tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.

5-13

CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure
cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.

5-14

CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.

NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So use the recommended coolant.

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-15

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.

5-16

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark on the coolant
surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan(s).

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight.

By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on the
coolant surge tank.

5-17

If a Tire Goes Flat
Your Corvette has no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment and no place to store a tire.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
“Tires” in the Index. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much
more likely to leak out slowly.
If your vehicle has Extended Mobility Tires (EMT), you
won’t need to stop on the side of the road to change a
flat tire. EMT tires can operate effectively with no air
pressure. If you drive on a deflated EMT for 50 miles
(80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or
less, there is a good chance that the tire can be repaired.
Contact the nearest authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear
EMT servicing facility, as soon as possible, to have the
flat tire inspected and repaired or replaced. For more
information, see “Extended Mobility Tires” in the Index.

5-18

CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service an Extended Mobility Tire (EMT). If
these special tools and procedures aren’t used,
you or others could be injured and your vehicle
could be damaged. Always be sure the proper
tools and procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
To order a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

Z06 models do not have Extended Mobility Tires. If a
Z06 model tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Put the shift lever (manual transmission)
in REVERSE (R).
4. Turn off the engine.

sealant. The tire pressure is checked after driving for a
maximum of 10 minutes to see if the slow leak has been
stopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or more,
inflate the tire up to the standard operating pressure as
shown on the Tire Pressure Label found on the rear edge
of the driver’s door. See “Tires, Pressure” in the Index.
You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.
For more information regarding the tire inflator kit see
“Tire Inflator Kit” following this section.

5. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has
damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid air
loss, call a tire repair facility. See “Roadside Assistance”
in the Index.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the Tire Inflator Kit may be
used to repair the damaged tire temporarily. The kit uses
a liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at least
26 psi (179 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the tire

NOTICE:
If the tire pressure has dropped below 19 psi
(131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven
further. Damage to the tire may be severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Contact Roadside
Assistance, see “Roadside Assistance” in
the Index.

5-19

Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Models Only)
Every Z06 model with P295/35ZR18 and
P265/40ZR17 tires, when new, was equipped with a Tire
Inflator Kit. The repair kit contains a detailed instruction
card that outlines step by step the temporary repair
procedure. Be sure to read and follow all the Tire
Inflator Kit instructions. The kit also includes:

A.
B.
C.
D.

Air Compressor
Tire Sealant
Sealant Filling Hose
Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
E. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose

5-20

F. Air Pressure Gage
G. Sealant Filling
Hose Plug
H. Valve
Core Remover
I. Spare Valve Core
J. 55-mph Label

Tire Sealant

Air Compressor

The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into
a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts in
the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot repair
tire damage caused while driving on a flat tire or a tire
that has had a “blow out” or a tire that has punctures in
the sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution is a one-time
use application for one tire only. Check the tire sealant
expiration date; the sealant may not be as effective
beyond the expiration date. The tire sealant can be
peeled off easily after drying.

The air compressor included in the Tire Inflator Kit,
was designed exclusively for the Z06 Model equipped
with P295/35ZR18 and P265/40ZR17 tires. After the
sealant has been injected into the flat tire, use the air
compressor to inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (179 kPa).
Instructions for connecting and using the air compressor
are located on the air compressor.

NOTICE:
Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Extended Mobility Tires or tire
pressure monitors. The tire sealant can damage
tire pressure monitor sensors. See “Extended
Mobility Tires” in the Index.

A. Inflating Hose
B. Air Pressure Gage
C. Air Compressor Plug

5-21

NOTICE:
The car engine must be running to avoid draining
the battery while running the air compressor.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Parking Your Vehicle, Manual
Transmission” in the Index.

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
with the engine running, if the shift lever is not in
NEUTRAL (N) with the parking brake firmly set
(manual transmission). Your vehicle can roll or
move suddenly even when on fairly level ground.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, always
set your parking brake and move the shift lever
to NEUTRAL (N) when you start or idle
your engine.

5-22

CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with the
climate control system off can cause deadly
carbon monoxide (CO). See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.

CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured. Be
sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate
the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).

NOTICE:
Do not allow the air compressor to operate
continuously for more than 6 minutes to help
prevent damage from overheating.

NOTICE:
If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure cannot be
reached after 6 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven further. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air
compressor plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
valve. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.

If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure is reached in 6 minutes
or less, disconnect the air compressor and attach the
enclosed maximum speed label to the inside upper
lefthand corner of the windshield or to the face of
the radio/clock.
The maximum speed
label reminds you to
drive cautiously and
not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until you
have the damaged tire
inspected and repaired.

Place the air compressor pump and accessories into the
inflator kit case and store in the hatch/trunk
compartment area of your vehicle.

5-23

Tire Inflator Kit Storage
The Tire Inflator Kit is stored in the rear hatch/trunk
area of your vehicle.

1. Remove the elastic cord (A) from around the
retaining hook (B) and slide the kit out from under
the elastic band (C) that is secured to the floor of the
hatch/trunk area.
2. Unwrap the elastic cord (A) from around the handle
of the Tire Inflator Kit. Open the Tire Inflator Kit
case by lifting up the two tabs located on either side
of the kit handle.
To Stow the Tire Inflator Kit:

CAUTION:

A. Removable Elastic Cord
B. Rear Retaining Hook
C. Elastic Band

5-24

Storing the Tire Inflator Kit or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store the
tire inflator kit in the proper place.

A. Tire Inflator Kit

B. Removable Elastic Cord

1. Loop the elastic cord (B) around the handle of the
Tire Inflator Kit (A).

C. Rear Retaining Hook
D. Elastic Band
2. Insert the tire inflator kit under the elastic band (D)
that is secured to the floor of the hatch/trunk area of
your vehicle.
3. Wrap elastic cord (B) around the retaining hook (C).

5-25

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow

NOTICE:

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

CAUTION:

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

5-26

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. You should turn your
TCS System off. See “Traction Control System” in the
Index. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
For a manual transmission, shift slowly between either
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), allowing
the wheels to stop before shifting into gear. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you
may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-9
6-12
6-17
6-19
6-19
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-32
6-33
6-38

Service
Fuel
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-

6-40
6-53
6-57
6-57
6-60
6-60
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-63
6-63
6-65
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-74
6-75
6-76

Tires
Lifting Your Corvette
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.

Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher for best performance. You may use middle grade
or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association
for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could
provide improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other gasolines.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the fuel pump.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Canada Only

6-3

Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 (at
least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index. If this occurs, return to
your authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

6-4

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not
the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Chevrolet dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.

If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

6-5

The fuel filler door release
button is located inside
of the center console
storage compartment.

The fuel filler door is located on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. The fuel cap is attached by a tether for
your convenience.

6-6

If your fuel filler door release won’t operate, there is a
manual release tab. The tab is located against the upper
trim on the driver’s side in the rear compartment. Pull
the tab to manually release the fuel filler door.

While refueling, rest the tether across the tab on the fuel
filler door to prevent damage to your vehicle’s finish.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

6-7

CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

6-8

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the
right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-9

Hood Release

NOTICE:
In order to avoid possible contact of the hood to
the headlamp doors, either take care in raising
the hood with the headlamps up, or turn off the
headlamps prior to opening the hood.

To open the hood, first
pull the handle located
inside the vehicle below
the instrument panel on
the driver’s side.

Then go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear
edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and close
it firmly.

6-10

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, you’ll see the following:

A. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
B. Battery
C. Engine Oil Dipstick

D.
E.
F.
G.

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir

H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
Reservoir (If Equipped)
I. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir

6-11

Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL LEVEL message on the Driver
Information Center comes on, it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see “Driver Information Center” in the
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine Oil

The engine oil dipstick
handle is a yellow
ring located near the
coolant surge tank.
See “Engine
Compartment
Overview” in
the Index for
more information
on location.

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil level every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Do not check the engine oil level after the engine has
been sitting overnight. A higher than normal reading
might be obtained. Check oil level with the oil warm.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.

6-12

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or a
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down.

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, you’ll need to
add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
See “Racing or Other Competitive Driving” in the index
for additional information on engine oil.

The engine oil fill cap is
located on top of the valve
cover on the passenger’s
side of the engine.
See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index
for more information
on location.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

6-13

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:

D GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. You
should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.

NOTICE:
If you use oils that don’t have the GM4718M
Standard designation, you can cause engine
damage not covered by your warranty.

6-14

D SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE
10W-30 if it’s going to be 0_F (-18_C) or above.
These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such
as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst symbol
on the container. This
symbol indicates that the
oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum
Institute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard 4718M and have the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1R synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. If temperatures are above 0_F (-18_C),
you may substitute SAE 10W-30 with the starburst
symbol. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.

Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.

6-15

When to Change Engine Oil

How to Reset the Change Oil Soon Message

Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to
change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,
but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that the
oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System will
indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between
oil changes will vary depending on how you drive your
vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
15,000 miles (25 000 km) since your last oil and filter
change. Under severe conditions, the system may
come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive
your vehicle more than 15,000 miles (25 000 km)
or 12 months (whichever occurs first) without an
oil change. Use engine oil meeting the GM
Standard GM4718M.

To reset the CHANGE OIL SOON message after an oil
change, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage
is displayed.
3. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFE
REMAIN 100% will appear.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message appears. Remember to reset the
Engine Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed.

6-16

What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for
very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or throw away clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.

6-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement
To remove the engine air cleaner/filter:

2. Pull the assembly out.
3. Replace the filter. See “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
1. Pull up on the clips on each side to release
the assembly.

4. Push the assembly back into place.
5. Fasten the clips.

6-18

How to Check

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of
these conditions:

It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D High performance operation.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at your dealer
service department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.

If you do not use your vehicle under one of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for
the proper service intervals for the transmission fluid
and filter.

Manual Transmission Fluid
NOTICE:
We recommend that only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III be used, because fluid with that
label is made specially for your automatic
transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.

When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’t require changing.

6-19

How to Check

Then, follow these steps:

Because this operation can be difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.

6-20

1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.

How to Add Fluid

When to Check and What to Use

Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
4. Tighten the plug to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m).

Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

6-21

How to Check and Add Fluid

Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant

Fluid should be added if the fluid level is below the step
on the inside of the reservoir. There are additional
instructions on the reservoir cap. Put the rubber seal and
cap back on. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

6-22

What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115. To
completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml)
of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to
the bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic
Gear Lubricant.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:

D
D
D
D
D

Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.

6-23

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.

6-24

NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on the front
of the coolant surge tank. Don’t overfill the surge tank.
Too much coolant can result in an overflow when the
fluid is hot.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.

6-25

Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.

Power Steering Fluid

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight.

Surge Tank Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
The surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
information on location.

6-26

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

What to Use

Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.

D When the engine

compartment is hot, the
level should be at the
HOT mark.

Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

D When the engine

compartment is cool, the
level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.

6-27

Adding Washer Fluid

NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

6-28

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid

level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

6-29

Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it
isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there
is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.

NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

6-30

brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on
your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).

CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

6-31

Brake Adjustment

Battery

As you make brake stops, your disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. For battery replacement, see your dealer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. After
the battery has been replaced, refer to the “Remote
Keyless Entry System” in the Index to resynchronize
your transmitter(s). See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for battery location.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.

6-32

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

Bulb Replacement

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.

CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in
this section, contact your Chevrolet dealer’s
service department.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.

6-33

Headlamps
1. The headlamp doors need to be halfway open. Turn
the headlamps on, then quickly back to the parking
lamps setting. You may have to do this a few times
to get the half-open position.

2. Remove the screws using a screwdriver on each side
of the headlamp bezel.
3. Open the hood.

You can also open the headlamp doors manually by
turning the adjuster counterclockwise.

6-34

4. To remove the bezel, pull the sides slightly outward
and tilt the bezel forward. Pull the clip centered
above the lens outward. Be careful not to scratch
the paint.

Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps

5. Reach behind the lamp and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it. Don’t touch the
halogen bulbs. The inner bulb is the high beam and
the outer bulb is the low beam.

B. Inboard Taillamp

6. Disconnect the desired bulb from the wiring harness.

C. Outboard Taillamp

A. Back-up Lamp

7. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.

6-35

1. Remove the screws using a TorxR screwdriver.
2. Pull the taillamp housing assembly out.

6-36

3. To remove the socket with the bulb, squeeze the tab
while you turn the socket counterclockwise.

Back-Up Lamps
You can access the back-up lamps through the inboard
taillamp opening. See “Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps”
in the Index.
1. Squeeze the tab on the socket while turning it
counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket.
5. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.

6-37

Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement

To remove the wiper blade assembly, do the following:

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the index for more information.

2. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position.

1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield wipers.

Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in
the Index.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly every six months.

NOTICE:
Use care when removing or installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.

A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab

6-38

D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook

3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to
release it from the wiper arm hook (F).
4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A). The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
To install the new wiper insert, do the following:

1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end
with two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the way
through the blade claws at the opposite end (B).
Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is
fully installed.
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom claws.
Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on
both sides of the insert slots.
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.

6-39

Installation guide:

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation

6-40

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

D Overinflated tires are more likely to be

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.

Extended Mobility Tires
(Except ZO6 Models)
Your vehicle, when new, had Goodyear Extended
Mobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment and no place to store a tire in the
vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires perform so well
without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is
used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of
the road to change the tire. You can just keep on driving.
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the tire will not have
to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated EMT for
50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph

(90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that the tire can
be repaired. The tire can operate effectively with no air
pressure for up to 200 miles (320 km) at speeds up to
55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then have to be
replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides a
cushion between the road and the wheel. Because you
won’t have this cushion when driving on a deflated tire,
try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel and
require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a deflated
EMT, check with an authorized Goodyear EMT Service
Center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s extended
mobility feature, all replacement tires must be Extended
Mobility Tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest
authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear EMT servicing
facility for inspection and repair or replacement. To
locate the nearest Chevrolet or Goodyear EMT servicing
facility, call Roadside Assistance. For phone numbers
and Roadside Assistance details, see “Roadside
Assistance” or “Canadian Roadside Assistance” in
the Index. You may also contact Goodyear, for the
nearest authorized EMT servicing facility, by
calling 1-800-789-9878.

6-41

CAUTION:
Extended mobility tires are constructed
differently than other tires and could explode
during improper service. You or others could be
injured or killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount an extended mobility tire.
Let only an authorized Goodyear EMT Service
Center repair, replace, dismount and mount
extended mobility tires.
The valve stems on your extended mobility tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM). See “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the Index. These
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last for
10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer if you ever need to have a wheel replaced, or if
the sensors ever need replacement.

6-42

NOTICE:
Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves
and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
extended mobility tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants
in your extended mobility tires.
If you feel that winter tires are needed for your driving
conditions, Goodyear Eagle M+S EMT tires are
available in your original equipment sizes from an
authorized Goodyear EMT retailer. These tires will
improve snow traction while maintaining your
Corvette’s extended mobility feature. When using winter
tires on your vehicle, be sure to use them on all
four wheels. See “Buying New Tires” in the Index.

Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the
rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.

6-43

How to Check

Tire Pressure Monitor (If Equipped)

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) has a sensor on
each road wheel that transmits to a receiver on the
instrument panel.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor, you can check tire inflation pressures while
driving. After you’ve reached a speed of 15 mph
(24 kmh) or more, press and release the GAGES button
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the front
tire pressures are displayed. Then, press and release the
GAGES button for the rear tire pressures. If the display
doesn’t show tire pressure, or if the SERVICE TIRE
MON SYS message appears, see your dealer for service.
For more information, see “Tire Pressure Monitor” and
“Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the Index.

6-44

The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry and Science Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If a tire’s inflation pressure is between 5 psi (35 kPa)
and 25 psi (170 kPa), you will see a message on the
Driver Information Center. This message will show
which tire is underinflated and two chimes will sound.
An example would be LOW TIRE PRESSURE-LR.
This would mean that the inflation pressure in your left
rear tire is between 5 psi (35 kPa) and 25 psi (170 kPa).
If the inflation pressure in the tire drops below 5 psi
(35 kPa), the message would read FLAT TIRE-LR and
four chimes will sound. See “Driver Information
Center” in the Index.
The TPM will also alert you if a tire’s pressure is higher
than 42 psi (290 kPa). The message will show which tire
is overinflated and two chimes will sound. An example
would be HIGH PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that
the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is higher than
42 psi (290 kPa). See “Driver Information Center” in
the Index.

If a tire pressure message appears on the Driver
Information Center, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your
Tire Loading Information label. See “Inflation -- Tire
Pressure” in the Index.

6-45

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep

Tire Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:

D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

6-46

enough to show cord or fabric.

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle) or
types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
may not handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes (other than
those originally installed on your vehicle) may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size and type tires on all four wheels.

CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

If your vehicle is equipped with Extended Mobility
Tires and you feel that winter tires are needed, see
“Extended Mobility Tires” in the Index.

6-47

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-48

Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -- A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-49

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.

CAUTION:

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

NOTICE:

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire
clearance to the body and chassis.

6-50

CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or paper towel to
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.

NOTICE:
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.

6-51

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Your vehicle’s wheel lock key has a unique registration
number. The registration number is printed on a card
included in your lock nut package. Also on this card is
lost key replacement information. This number is not
recorded by GM or your dealer, so be sure not to lose
this card. You will need the information if you ever lose
your wheel lock key.
If you or someone else is going to remove the wheels on
your vehicle, make sure that the special wheel lock key
is being used to remove the wheel locks.

Using the Wheel Lock Key

NOTICE:

If you have a Z06, the wheel lock key sits in a small
depression in the trunk rail on the left side, underneath
the carpeting.

Your wheel lock key or lock nuts could be
damaged if an air or impact wrench is used with
this key.

If you have a coupe or a convertible, the wheel lock key
sits in a small depression in the trunk rail directly under
the left rear compartment cover.

6-52

Tire Chains

NOTICE:
Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.

Lifting Your Corvette
CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to lift your vehicle. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks in front of and behind
the wheels.

6-53

CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to place the jack in the
proper location before raising the vehicle.
If you ever use a jack to lift your Corvette, such as to
display it at a show, follow the instructions that came
with the jack, and be sure to use the correct lifting points
to avoid damaging your vehicle.

6-54

NOTICE:
Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To lift your vehicle properly,
follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
D Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
D Make sure the jack you’re using spans at
least two crossmember ribs.
D Lift only in the areas shown in the
following pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer and
the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.

Lifting From the Front

The front lifting point can be accessed from either the
driver’s or passenger’s side of the vehicle, behind the
front tires.
1. Locate the lifting point (B) on either side of your
vehicle to jack the vehicle according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and
the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A).

6-55

Lifting From the Rear

The rear lifting point can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
1. Locate the lifting point to jack your vehicle
according to the illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and
the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A).
For more information, see “Doing Your Own Service
Work” in the Index.

6-56

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Gasoline

They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Naphtha

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.

Carbon Tetrachloride

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Acetone

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Benzene

Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

6-57

Here are some cleaning tips:

D
D
D
D

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.

Cleaning Coated Moldings
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the
rear area.

D When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft
lint-free cloth dampened with water.
D When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Cleaning Leather

Cleaning the Security Shade and
Convenience Net

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse
with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.

6-58

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing
ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass, be sure to
remove the acrylic roof panel, if so equipped. These
products may damage the panel.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

6-59

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.

Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing
and/or storing the roof panel.

D Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel.

D Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the
cleaner on the panel for one minute, then wipe the
panel with a soft, lint-free cloth.

D Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials.
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the
panel gets wet, you should dry it off.

6-60

NOTICE:
Do not use a glass treatment or conditioner
containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on
the roof panel. These products may damage
the panel.

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.

See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

NOTICE:
Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes
may damage your vehicle. They may not have
enough clearance for the undercarriage or for the
wide rear tires.
Check with the manager before using a car wash.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

6-61

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use
an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use
a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge. A
chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush
can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a
few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,
then let the top dry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

D After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry before you lower it.

D Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish;
it could leave streaks.

D If you decide to go through an automatic car

wash, ask the manager if the equipment could
damage your top.

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

6-62

Cleaning Tires

Magnesium Wheel Finish

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Improper paint repair or refinishing can cause
corrosion damage to a magnesium wheel. See
your dealer if a magnesium wheel needs paint
repair or refinishing.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.

6-63

Titanium Exhaust System
(Z06 Model)
Time and high performance driving conditions can cause
a color change in titanium exhaust system parts. This is
normal for a titanium surface.

Fiberglass Springs
NOTICE:
Don’t use corrosive or acidic cleaning agents,
engine degreasers, aluminum cleaning agents or
other harsh solvents to clean fiberglass springs;
they’ll damage the springs.

6-64

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427

SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)

1052918**

8 oz. (0.237 L)

DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner

t Protectant

Armor All

Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925

16 oz. (0.473 L)

USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-65

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label located inside the glovebox. It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

D
D
D
D

your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-66

Electrical System

Accessory Power Plug

Add-On Electrical Equipment

The accessory power plug can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio. It is located behind the carpeting, on the
passenger’s side toe-board, at the top left corner near the
body control module. Be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the equipment.

NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

To use the accessory power plug, do the following:
1. Remove the toe-board panel by lifting up on the
latches at the top of each corner of the panel.
2. Locate the black connector at the top left corner of
the compartment near the body control module
above the two white diagnostic connectors.
3. Disconnect the connector pigtail by pulling forward
on the plastic locking tab and pull the connection
apart from the wire harness.

6-67

The plug has the following three separate wires:

D The orange wire connects to battery power.
D The yellow wire connects to ignition power.

(Power is only available when the ignition is in ON.)

NOTICE: (Continued)

D Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment

D The black wire connects to ground.

NOTICE:
When using the accessory power plug:
D DO NOT splice wires directly into the
vehicle electrical wire harness. If done
incorrectly, splicing may cause damage to
your electrical system and would not be
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
D The maximum load of any electrical
equipment should not exceed 15 amps.
NOTICE: (Continued)

6-68

when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods of time
can drain your battery.
DO NOT use this plug if the electrical
equipment requires frequent connecting
and disconnecting. This may cause
excessive wear on the accessory power
plug and damage your electrical system
and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty.

Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse and
an internal circuit breaker. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power seats and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle, under the
instrument panel and
under the toe-board.

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of maxi-fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.

Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access the
fuse block by lifting up on the latches at the top of each
corner of the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.

6-69

Minifuse
1
2
3
4
5
6

6-70

Usage
Console Cigarette Lighter
Monitored (Inadvertent)
Load Control
Lumbar Seat
Driver Seat Control Module
Radio, Compact Disc Player
Parking Lamps, Taillamps

Minifuse
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

22
23
24

Usage
Cigarette Lighter
Stoplamp, Hazard Flashers
Body Control Module
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Accessory Power
Blank
Body Control Module - Ignition 1
Crank
Hazard/Turn Signal
Air Bag
Tonneau Release
HVAC Controls
Instrument Panel Control
Cruise Control
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System and Inside
Rearview Mirror
Body Control Module - Ignition 3
Body Control Module - Ignition 2
Radio Antenna

Minifuse
25

Usage
Body Control Module - Ignition 1,
Instrument Panel Control
26
Hatch/Trunk Release
27
HVAC Controls
28
Bose Speakers
29
Diagnostic
30
Right Door Control Module
31
Power Feed Door Right
32
Fuel Tank Door
33
Door Control Module Left
34
Power Feed Door Left
Circuit Breaker Usage
35
Driver Power Seat
36
Passenger Power Seat
Micro Relay
Usage
37
Monitored (Inadvertent)
Load Control
38
Right Daytime Running Lamp
39
Hatch/Trunk Release
40
Left Daytime Running Lamp

Micro Relay
41
42
43
44
Mini Relay
45
46
Maxifuse
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Maxi Circuit
Breaker
54

Usage
Tonneau Release
Courtesy Lamps
Automatic Lamp Control
Parking Lamps
Automatic Lamp
Control Headlamps
Usage
Bose Speakers
Rear Defogger
Usage
Ignition 1
Rear Defogger
Blank
Ignition 2
Blower Motor
Starter
Blank
Usage
Headlamps

6-71

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

There is one fuse block in the engine compartment
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle in front
of the battery.
To remove the fuse block cover, turn the
knob counterclockwise.

6-72

Minifuse
1
2
3
4
5

Usage
Rear Fog Lamp
Approach
Right Headlamp Motor
Left Headlamp Motor
Anti-Lock Brakes, Selective Real
Time Damping (SRTD)

Minifuse
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Usage
Fog Lamp
Selective Real Time Damping
(SRTD) Relay
Headlamp Low-Beam Right
Headlamp High-Beam Right
Headlamp Low-Beam Left
Horn
Headlamp High-Beam Left
Fuel Pump
Cooling Fan - Ignition 3
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain Control Module
Throttle Control
Injector 2
Engine Ignition
Blank
Blank
Injector 1
Powertrain Control Module

Minifuse
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Micro Relay
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

Usage
Air Conditioning
Blank
Blank
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Usage
Air Pump
Air Conditioner and Clutch
Fuel Pump
Horn
Rear Fog Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
Fog Lamp
Blank
Selective Real Time
Damping (SRTD)

6-73

Mini Relay
42
43
44
45
Maxi-Fuse
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

6-74

Usage
Ignition 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 1
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Blank
Blank
Cooling Fan 1
Air Pump
Blank
Anti-Lock Brakes
Selective Real Time Damping
(SRTD) Electronics
Fuse Puller

Replacement Bulbs
High-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Low-Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057
Front/Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rear Stop/Tail and Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
For any bulb replacements or procedures not listed here,
please consult your dealer.

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in
English and metric conversions.
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . See the refrigerant
information label under the hood.
Automatic Transmission
Drain and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 quarts (10.2 L)
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 quarts (11.9 L)
Crankcase
With Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 quarts (6.1 L)

Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 U.S. gallons (70.0 L)
Manual Transmission
(Overhaul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 quarts (3.8 L)
Rear Axle
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.69 quarts (1.6 L)
Limited Slip Additive . . . . . . . 4.0 ounces (118 ml)
Tire Pressures . . . . . . See Tire-Loading Information
label on rear edge of driver’s door.
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to
fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

6-75

Engine Specifications
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7L V8
VIN Engine Code
LS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G
LS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
Displacement . . . . . . . . . 346 cubic inches (5665 cc)
Fuel Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequential Multi-Port
Fuel Injection (SFI)
Valve Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead Valve
Piston Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7L
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.90 inches (9.9 cm)
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62 inches (9.2 cm)
Compression Ratio
LS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0:1
LS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5:1
Horsepower
LS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350@5600 rpm
LS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380@6000 rpm
Torque
LS1 (Automatic Transmission) . . . . 360@4000 rpm
LS1 (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . 370@4400 rpm
LS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380@4800 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3
Thermostat Starts to Open . . . . . . . . 187 F (86 C)

6-76

Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A917C*
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75P-7YR*
Coolant Surge Tank Cap . . . GM Part No. 10296465
15 psi (105 kPa)
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF44*
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV948C*
0.060 inch (1.524 mm)
Spark Plug . . . . . . . . . . PTJ16R15 (0.060 inch Gap)
Denso Type Number
Windshield Wiper Blade
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 inches (55.9 cm)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 mm x 3 mm Shepherd’s Hook
* ACDelcoR part number.

Vehicle Dimensions

Engine Accessory Drive Belt Routing

Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.5 inches (265.5 cm)
Front Tread
Coupe/convertible . . . . . . . . 61.9 inches (157.2 cm)
Z06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.4 inches (158.4 cm)
Rear Tread
Coupe/convertible . . . . . . . . 62.0 inches (157.4 cm)
Z06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.6 inches (158.9 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179.7 inches (456.4 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73.6 inches (186.9 cm)
Height
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.7 inches (121.1 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.8 inches (121.4 cm)
Z06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.7 inches (121.2 cm)

6-77

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-13

Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Part B: Owner Checks and Services

7-17
7-19
7-21

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record

7-1

Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

7-2

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.

How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle
for warranty repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.

7-4

This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Part B: Owner Checks and Services,”
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” and
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
following Part A.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emissions warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
Engine Oil Life SystemR (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system. The system
will show you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 15,000 miles (25 000 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) or 12 months without an oil and
filter change. Use engine oil meeting the
GM Standard GM4718M.

7-6

The Engine Oil Life System won’t detect dust in the oil.
So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your
oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if
the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears. Remember
to reset the system when the oil and filter have been
changed. See “Engine Oil Life System” in the Index for
more information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.

Scheduled Maintenance

7-7

Scheduled Maintenance

7-8

Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Replace air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-9

Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– Uses such as high performance operation.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km). Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.

7-10

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Replace air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Replace spark plugs.

An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

(Continued)

7-11

Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– Uses such as high performance operation.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the
fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill the cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
An Emission Control Service.

7-12

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.

At Least Once a Month

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service

Engine Oil Level Check

Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.

Power Antenna Service

Engine Coolant Level Check

Clean power antenna mast. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.

7-13

At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.

7-14

Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. Check for
leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. Have
the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Inspection
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle
to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood,
rear compartment, console door and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

7-15

Ignition Automatic Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

7-16

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

Steering and Suspension Inspection

Tire and Wheel Inspection
Inspect the tires for uneven wear or damage. If there is
irregular or premature wear, check the wheel alignment.
Inspect for damaged wheels.

Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.

7-17

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it
if needed.

7-18

Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.

NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by
name, part number or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil

The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM
Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see “Engine Oil”
in the Index.

Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent

Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer
Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.

Hydraulic
Clutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345347 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).

Power
Steering System

GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).

7-19

USAGE
Manual
Transmission
Automatic
Transmission

FLUID/LUBRICANT

USAGE

DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl

DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

Key
Lock Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261
or equivalent) meeting GM
Specification 9986115. With a
complete drain and refill add
4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip
Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part
No. 1052358 or equivalent) where
required. See “Rear Axle” in
the Index.

7-20

FLUID/LUBRICANT

LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and
Door Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).

Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record
DATE

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-21

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-22

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Maintenance Record
DATE

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-23

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-24

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance

8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11

Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

8-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

8-3

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

8-4

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)

From:
Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-5

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone,
our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer
recommended service providers. Roadside membership
is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over-the-phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs

To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2001 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone
roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.

8-6

(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2001 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2001 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.

8-7

Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.

8-8

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Additional Program Information

Warranty Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.

8-9

REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

8-10

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170

8-11

2001 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $60.00

SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207

8-12

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

2
0
0
1

PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL
NAME

YEAR

QTY.

PRICE
EACH*

Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair

2001

$120.00

2001

$50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

2001

$60.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

2001

$20.00

TOTAL
PRICE

G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(STATE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(ZIP CODE)

(

)

AREA CODE

GM-CHE-ORD99

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T

Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)

TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing

MasterCard
VISA

$6.00

Canadian Postage

GRAND TOTAL

Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:

Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.

8-13

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2000:07:12 10:50:10
Title                           : 2001 Chevrolet Corvette
Subject                         : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Author                          : Copyright General Motors Corp. 2000
Page Count                      : 383
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2001 Chevrolet Corvette 2001corvette

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation